Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Amarakosha Search
Results for tin
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
amaraḥ1.1.7-9MasculineSingularnirjaraḥ, vibudhaḥ, sumanasaḥ, āditeyaḥ, aditinandanaḥ, asvapnaḥ, gīrvāṇaḥ, daivatam, devaḥ, suraḥ, tridiveśaḥ, diviṣad, ādityaḥ, amartyaḥ, dānavāriḥ, devatā, tridaśaḥ, suparvā, divaukāḥ, lekhaḥ, ṛbhuḥ, amṛtāndhāḥ, vṛndārakaḥimmortal
gauḥ2.9.67-72FeminineSingularupasaryā, rohiṇī, bahusūtiḥ, kapilā, navasūtikā, ekahāyanī, droṇakṣīrā, bandhyā, saurabheyī, garbhopaghātinī, arjunī, acaṇḍī, dhavalā, vaṣkayiṇī, dvivarṣā, pīnoghnī, tryabdā, samāṃsamīnā, sandhinī, vaśā, praṣṭhauhī, naicikī, pareṣṭukā, pāṭalā, suvratā, caturabdā, droṇadugdhā, avatokā, usrā, kālyā, aghnyā, sukarā, kṛṣṇā, dhenuḥ, ekābdā, pīvarastanī, trihāyaṇī, māheyī, vehad, śṛṅgiṇī, bālagarbhiṇī, śavalī, cirasūtā, dvihāyanī, sukhasaṃdohyā, caturhāyaṇī, dhenuṣyā, sravadgarbhā, mātā(49)cow
havaḥ3.3.215MasculineSingularsatāṃmatiniścayaḥ, prabhāvaḥ
janīFeminineSingularcakravartinī, saṃsparśā, jatūkā, rajanī, jatukṛt
kacchaḥ3.3.35MasculineSingulardantaḥ(hastinaḥ)
kākenduḥMasculineSingularkulakaḥ, kākapīlukaḥ, kākatindukaḥ
pratimā2.10.36MasculineSingularpratiyātanā, praticchāyā, pratikṛtiḥ, arcā, pratimānam, pratinidhiḥ, pratibimbam
strī2.6.2FeminineSingularsīmantinī, abalā, mahilā, pratīpadarśinī, nārī, yoṣit, vanitā, vadhūḥ, yoṣā, vāmā
tindukaḥ2.4.38MasculineSingularkālaskandhaḥ, śitisārakaḥ, sphūrjakaḥ
tindukī3.5.8FeminineSingular
tiniśaḥ2.4.26MasculineSingularnemiḥ, rathadruḥ, atimuktakaḥ, vañjulaḥ, citrakṛt, syandanaḥ
tintiḍīkam2.9.36NeuterSingularcukram, ‍vṛkṣāmlam
atinuMasculineSingularlanded from boat
titinḍī2.2.43FeminineSingularciñcā, amblikā
śrīhastinīFeminineSingularbhuruṇḍī
Monier-Williams Search
Results for tin
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
tināśaka equals niśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindinīf. equals du- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindiśam. Name of a plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindum. Diospyros embryopteris (also dinī- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindum. Strychnos nux vomica (also duka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindubilvan. Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindukam. Diospyros embryopteris, (n.) its fruit (yielding a kind of resin used as pitch for caulking vessels etc.) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindukam. equals du- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindukan. a kind of weight (equals karṣa-; equals suvarṇa- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindukīf. equals ki-
tindukif. Diospyros embryopteris View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindukinīf. the senna plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindulam. equals duki- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinikāf. Holcus Sorghum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiniśam. Dalbergia Ujjeinensis View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiniśam. see timiśa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍam. (also titt- ) equals dikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍam. Name of a daitya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍam. equals kāla-dāsa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍamf(ī-). sour sauce (especially made of the tamarind fruit) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīf. equals ḍikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīf. equals ḍimba- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīf. of da- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīdyūtan. a kind of game (odd and even played with tamarind seeds) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍikāf. the tamarind tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīkam. (titl- Va1rtt. 2 ; tittirīka- ) the tamarind tree (alsof(ā-). ), (n.) its fruit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīkan. sour sauce (especially made of the tamarind fruit) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintiḍīphalan. the sour skin of a Garcinia fruit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintilīf. equals tiḍikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintilikāf. equals tiḍikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintilīkan. the tamarind fruit (tinīka- varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tintilīkāf. equals likā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhighātinmfn. (generally in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') striking, attacking, hurting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhighātinmfn. inflicting injury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhighātinm. an assailant, enemy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhikrāntinmfn. one who has undertaken (the study of) id est conversant with (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhimātinmfn. insidious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhipātinmfn. hastening near View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhipātinmfn. running to the help of (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivartinmfn. coming towards, approaching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivartinmfn. going towards (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivratinmfn. bent on (compound), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiyātinm. an assailant, enemy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyāghātinmfn. attacking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyāsaparivartin(for abhyāśa--) mfn. wandering about or near View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyatinīto bring or place upon (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyāvartinmfn. coming near, coming repeatedly (vocative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyāvartinmfn. returning (as days) (an-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyāvartinm. Name of a king (son of cāyamāna- and descendant of pṛthu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
acyutacakravartinm. Name (also title or epithet) of the author of a commentator or commentary on the Da1ya-bha1ga, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adantāghātinmfn. not striking against the teeth (as a sound), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhītinmfn. well read, proficient, (gaRa iṣṭādi-, q.v) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhītinmfn. occupied with the study of the veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditinandanam. equals -ja- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityānuvartinmfn. following the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
advaitinm. "non-dualist", an adherent of śaṃkara-, Sa1m2khyas., Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aghātinmfn. not fatal, not injurious, harmless. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āgūrtinmfn. one who pronounces the āgur- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahivratinmfn. one who lives like a snake (only on air), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
akṛtinmfn. unfit for work, not clever. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amitraghātin mfn. killing, enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmnātinm. (fr. ā-mnāta-), one who has mentioned or quoted commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāgūrtinmfn. one who has not recited the āgur- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anatinedam. not foaming over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
andhakaghātin m. "the slayer or enemy of the asura- andhaka-", Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anīcanuvartinmfn. not keeping low company View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anīcanuvartinm. a faithful lover or husband. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirākṛtinmfn. one who does not forget what he has learned, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirvartin(also) unalterable, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anivartinmfn. not turning back, brave, not returning. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anṛtinmfn. telling untruths, lying, a liar. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaḥpātinmfn. inserted, included in. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaḥpātinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') occurring in the interior of anything, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaḥpuravartin m. superintendent of the women's apartments, chamberlain. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarvartin mfn. internal, included, dwelling in. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarvartinīf. pregnant, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anugaṇitinmfn. one who has counted over, (gaRa iṣṭādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupaṭhitinm. (one who has read through or recited) , proficient, (gaRa iṣṭādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupātinmfn. following as a consequence or result. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupavītinm. one uninvested with the sacred thread. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuprasṛptinmfn. one who has crept after, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānusṛtineyamf. a descendant of anu-sṛti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvartinmfn. following, compliant, obedient, resembling. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuyuktinm. one who has enjoined, examined, (gaṇaiṣṭādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyatoghātinmfn. striking in one direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyatoghātinmfn. striking against another, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyāyavartin mfn. acting unjustly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyāyavartinmfn. following evil courses. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apaghātinmfn. idem or 'mf(ikā-)n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') warding off.' See apa-han-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apakṣapātinmfn. not flying with wings (and"a partisan of A id est viṣṇu-"), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aparāvṛttivartinmfn. turned away not to return, dcceased, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpātinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' falling on, happening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āplavavratinm. one whose duty is to perform the samāvartana- ablution (on returning home after completing his studies), an initiated householder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āplutavratinm. equals ā-plava-vratin- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpratinivṛtto cease completely. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpratinivṛttaguṇormicakramfn. (scilicet jñāna-,knowledge) through which the whole circle of wave-like qualities (of passion etc.) subside or cease completely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apratinodam. not repelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apravartinmfn. immovable, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arātinudmfn. expelling enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arcitinmfn. honouring (with locative case), (gaRa iṣṭādi-, q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhacakravartin m. "half a cakravartin- ", Name of the nine black vāsudeva-s (of the jaina-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhakaghātinmfn. "killing the water-snake"(?), Name of rudra- (adhvaga-gh- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditinmfn. having spasms of the jaw-bones View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃnipātinmfn. not producing an immediate effect, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃvatsarabhṛtinmfn. one who does not maintain (a fire) a whole year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsannavartinmfn. being or abiding in the neighbourhood or vicinity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
astināstiind. partly true and partly not, doubtful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
astināstitvan. being and not being, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvasūktinm. Name of the author of the hymns View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinamto bend aside, keep on one side. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinam(Causal - nāmayati-), to pass time, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atināmanm. Name of a saptarṣi- of the sixth manvantara-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atināṣṭramfn. beyond danger, out of danger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinaumfn. disembarked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinedto stream or flow over, foam over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinīto lead over or beyond, to help a person over anything etc. ; to allow to pass away: Intensive A1. -nenīy/ate-, to bring forward View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinīcamfn. excessively low. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinicṛt(or wrongly written ati-nivṛt-) f. Name of a Vedic metre of three pāda-s (containing respectively seven, six and seven syllables) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinidramfn. given to excessive sleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinidrāf. excessive sleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinidramind. See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinidramind. beyond sleeping time See also ati-nidra- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order ati-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinihnutya ind.p. ( hnu-), denying obstinately. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atiniḥśvasto breathe or sigh violently. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinipuṇamfn. very skilful. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atiniṣṭan( tan-), (perf. Potential 3. plural /ati-n/iṣ-ṭatanyuḥ-) to penetrate (with rays) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinuCaus. to turn away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atinudto drive by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atipātinmfn. overtaking, excelling in speed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atipātinmfn. (in med.) running a rapid course, acute, neglecting. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ativartinmfn. passing beyond, crossing, passing by, surpassing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ativartinmfn. guilty of a pardonable offence. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmaghātinm. idem or 'm. a suicide.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhāritinmfn. (gaRa iṣṭād- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadyotinmfn. equals -dyotaka-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaghātinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' threshing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaghātinmfn. striking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avakartinSee carmāvak-
avantinagarif. the city of the avanti-s, Oujein View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avartinmfn. behaving improperly, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinmfn. whirling or turning upon itself View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinmfn. returning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinm. a horse having curls of hair on various parts of his body (considered as a lucky mark) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinn. Name of particular stotra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinīf. a whirlpool View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvartinīf. Name of the plant Odina Pinnata etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avattinmfn. (after a cardinal num.)"dividing into so many parts" See catur-av- and pañcāi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avibhaktinmfn. unseparated (as co-heirs who have not divided their inheritance) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avijitinmfn. not victorious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avinipātinmfn. not erring (in one's duties, dharmeṣu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avinivartinmfn. not turning back, not fugitive (in battle). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvītin ī-. m. (a Brahman) who has the sacred thread on (in the usual manner over the left shoulder and under the right arm, see prācīnāvītin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avratinmfn. idem or 'mfn. equals avrata-vat- q.v ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āyuktinmfn. a fit official View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahirvartinmfn. being on the outside View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāhudantinm. Name of indra- (see bahudantī-suta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
baiḍālavratin() mfn. acting like a cat, hypocritical, a religious impostor (equals bhaṇḍa-tapasvin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bakavratinm. a hypocrite (especially a false devotee) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balacakravartinm. balacakra
bāṇapātavartinmfn. being within the range of an arrow (varia lectio -patha-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāṇapathavartinmfn. varia lectio for -pāta-v- below
bhagavadbhaktinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaktinamramfn. bent down in devotion, making a humble obeisance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhānumatinm. (fr. bhānumat-or -matī-) Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāvayatinm. an ascetic by life or conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāvicakravartinm. a future king, hereditary prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhītināṭitakan. mimic representation of fear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhrāntināśanam. "destroying error", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhrāṣṭravratinm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhṛtinSee saṃvatsara-bhṛtin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhujaṃgaghātinīf. "killing snakes", a species of plant (used as an antidote) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtinandam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtinidhānan. "receptacle of prosperity", Name of the nakṣatra- dhaniṣṭhā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmaghātinm. id View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmaghātinīf. a woman on the second day of the menses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinmfn. rolling everywhere without obstruction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinm. a ruler the wheels of whose chariot roll everywhere without obstruction, emperor, sovereign of the world, ruler of a cakra- (or country described as extending from sea to sea; 12 princes beginning with bharata- are especially considered as cakravartin-s) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinmfn. supreme, holding the highest rank among (genitive case or in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinm. Chenopodium album View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinm. Name of the author of a commentator or commentary on , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinm. Nardostachys jaṭāmāṃsi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinm. equals alaktaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakravartinīf. the fragrant plant jantukā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
carmāvakartinm. "leather-cutter", = ma-kṛt- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
catinmfn. equals c/atat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturavattinmfn. one who offers oblations consisting of 4 avadāna-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturdvīpacakravartinm. the sovereign of the 4 dvīpa-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturgṛhītinmfn. one who has taken up (any fluid) 4 times View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ceṣṭāpṛthaktvanivartinmfn. to be (or being) carried out by separate (repeated) acts, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadmaghātinmfn. killing deceitfully View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chandānuvartinmfn. idem or 'mfn. complying with the wishes (of others), submissive ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chandānuvartinmfn. following one's own will View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cintinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' thinking of. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cittānuvartinmfn. equals tta-cārin- ( cittānuvartitva rti-tva- n.abstr.) (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cittinmfn. intelligent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cittinSee 4. cit-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇataupavītinmfn. wearing the sacred thread on the right, iii, 17, 11 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇātinayana(ṇāt-) m. the mantra- with which the dakṣiṇā- cows are driven southwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daṇḍapātinmfn. punishing (with locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantahastinmfn. having tusks and a trunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantinmfn. tusked (gaṇeśa-) (ti- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantinm. an elephant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantinm. a mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantinīf. equals tikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devadantinm. Name of śiva- (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devavratinmfn. obeying or serving the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmacintinmfn. equals -cintaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmavartinmfn. "abiding in duty", righteous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmitāvacchedakapratyāsattinirūpaṇan. Name of work
digdantinm. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīrghānuparivartinmfn. having a long after-effect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditinandanam. equals -ja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrapātinmfn. flying far or a long way View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrapātinmfn. shooting to a distance, hitting from afar ( dūrapātitā ti-- f.and dūrapātitva ti-tva- n. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrāpātin equals ra-vedha-, dhin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūravartinmfn. being in the distance, far removed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūreṣupātinmfn. shooting arrows to a distance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durgatināśinīf. "removing distress", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duścintinmfn. "thinking evil thoughts", Name of a māra-putra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duṣkṛtinmfn. idem or 'mfn. acting wickedly, an evil-doer ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvaitinm. equals dvaita-vādin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dviyajñopavītinmfn. wearing two sacrificial threads, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyotinmfn. shining, brilliant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyotinmfn. meaning, expressing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyudantinm. heavenly elephant (see dik-karin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekadeśavivartinmfn. extending or relating to one part only, partial View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāntaritin(?) mfn. one who fasts every second day, L View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāntinmfn. idem or 'mfn. devoted to one aim or object or person or theory.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāntintitvan. devotion to only one object or thing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapātinmfn. having a common or the same appearance, appearing together, belonging to each other etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapātinmfn. having a single or common pratīka- or first word, quoted together as one verse (as mantra-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapātinflying (only) in one manner, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapātinbeing alone or solitary, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gabhastinemim. "the felly of whose wheel is sharp-edged (?)", Name of kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇapatināgam. Name (also title or epithet) of a king in āryāvarta-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇapatinātham. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhahastinm. equals -gaja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhahastinm. Name of an antidote (said to be very efficacious) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhahastinm. of the author of a commentator or commentary on ācārāṅga- (), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhahastinm. Name (also title or epithet) of a tathāgata-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇitinmfn. one who has calculated gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhaghātinīf. "embryo-killer, producing abortion", the poisonous plant Methonica superba View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhapātinīf. "causing miscarriage", the plant"causing miscarriage", the plant viśalyā-
garbhopaghātinīf. miscarrying (as a cow or female) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gartinmfn. gaRa prekṣādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gehevijitinmfn. "victorious at home", a house-hero, boaster View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghaṭaghātinīf. "jar-destroyer", a kind of bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghātinmfn. () in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' killing, murderous, murderer etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghātinmfn. destroying, ruining, destructive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghātinf. equals tanī- (see andhaka--, amitra--, ardhaka--, ātma--,etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtinmfn. containing ghee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtinSee 1. ghṛ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
giricakravartinm. "the mountain-king", Name of the himavat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. one who recites in a singing manner () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
goghātinm. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. a cow-killer ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gopālacakravartinm. Name of a scholiast View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gośatinmfn. possessing 100 cows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gośatinmfn. (gavāṃ ś-,4885.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gośṛṅgavratinm. plural Name of a sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
goṣṭhevijitinmfn. "victorious in a cow-pen" idem or 'mfn. "courageous in a cow-pen", a boasting coward ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
goṣūktinm. (kt-), Name of the author of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
govratinmfn. idem or 'mfn. one who imitates a cow in frugality ' , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grāmaghātinmfn. plundering a village View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grāmaghātinm. a village slaughterer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhapatinonly genitive case plural tinām- See -pati-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhītinmfn. one who has grasped etc. anything (locative case), gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇaghātinmfn. "destroying merit", detractor, envious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇavartinmfn. being on the path of virtue View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guruvartinmfn. idem or 'mfn. behaving respectfully towards parents or venerable persons ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harirāmacakravartinm. Name of a man. ()
hastavartinmfn. being or remaining in the hand, seized, held, caught hold of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastavartinm. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinmfn. having hands, clever or dexterous with the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinmfn. (with mṛga-,"the animal with a hands id est with a trunk ", an elephant; see dantah-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinmfn. having (or sitting on) an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. an elephant (four kinds of elephant are enumerated;See bhadra-, mandra-, mṛga-, miśtra-;some give kiliñja-h-,"a straw elephant","effigy of an elephant made of grass") etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') the chief or best of its kind gaRa vyāghrādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. a kind of plant (equals aja-modā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. Name of a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. of a son of suhotra-, (a prince of the Lunar race, described as founder of hastinā-pura-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. of a son of bṛhat-kṣatra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. of a son of kuru- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. a kind of drug and perfume (equals haṭṭa-vilāsinī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. a woman of a particular class (one of the 4 classes into which women are divided, described as having thick lips, thick hips, thick fingers, large breasts, dark complexion, and strong sexual passion) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinm. Name of hastinā-pura- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstinamfn. belonging to an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstinamfn. having the depth of an elephant (as water) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstinan. equals next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastināgam. a princely elephants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinakham. "elephant's nail", a sort of turret or raised mound of earth or masonry protecting the access to the gate of a city or fort (described as furnished with an inner staircase and with loopholes for discharging arrows etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastināpuran. (less correctly hastina-p-or hastinī-.) Name of a city founded by king hastin- q.v (it was situated about fifty-seven miles north-east of the modern Delhi on the banks of an old channel of the Ganges, and was the capital of the kings of the Lunar line, as ayodhyā- was of the Solar dynasty;hence it forms a central scene of action in the mahābhārata-;here yudhi-ṣṭhira- was crowned after a triumphal progress through the streets of the city;See : other names for this celebrated town are gajāhvaya-, nāga-hvaya-, nāgāhva-, hāctina-)
hāstinapuran. equals hastinā-pura- ( hāstinapuratva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstinapuratvan. hāstinapura
hastināsāf. an elephant's trunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastināyakam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstināyanamfn. (fr. hastin-) gaRa pakṣādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāstināyanam. a patronymic gaRa naḍādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastinīf. a female elephant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastiniṣadanan. a particular posture in sitting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdayopakartinmfn. suffering from a particular heart-disease View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdvaktrāvartinmfn. having a curl or lock of hair on the chest and head (as a horse) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdvartinmfn. dwelling in the heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
iṣṭāpūrtinmfn. one who has stored up sacrificial rites, or one who has performed sacrifices for himself and good works for others. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
itināmanmfn. having such a name View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
itiniścayamfn. one who has thus resolved, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jagadghātinmfn. destroying the world or mankind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgatineyaSee jārat-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jalahastinm. equals -dvipa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaratinm. Name of a man gaRa śubhrādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāratineyam. patronymic ft. jaratin- gaRa śubhrādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāratineyam. metron. fr. jaratin- gaRa kalyāṇy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinirṇayam. Name (also title or epithet) of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jīvaghātinmfn. destroying life (a beast of prey) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākatindum. a kind of ebony (Diospyros tomentosa) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākatindukam. a kind of ebony (Diospyros tomentosa) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kakudāvartinm. a horse having the above curl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kakuhastinā varia lectio for kakuh/a- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālaghātinmfn. (said of a poison) killing in the course of time (id est by degrees, slowly) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālatindukam. a kind of ebony View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṇṭhavartinmfn. being in the throat (as the vital air), about to escape View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapotinmfn. pigeon-shaped View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapotinmfn. having pigeons View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karṇapratināham. a particular disease of the ear (suppression of its excretion or wax, which is supposed to have dissolved and passed out by the nose and mouth) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kārukasiddhāntinm. plural Name of a śaiva- sect commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karūḷatinmfn. one whose teeth are decayed and broken, having gaps in the teeth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāryātipātinmfn. neglecting business commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kavicakravartinm. Name of pūrṇānanda-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiliñjahastinm. an elephant formed by mats View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kirātinīf. Indian spikenard (Nardostachys jaṭāmāṃsī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīrtināśinmfn. destroying reputation, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛcchravartinmfn. performing a penance, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛmighātinm. (equals -kaṇṭaka-) the plant Embelia Ribes (varia lectio krami-gh-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinmfn. one who acts, active
kṛtinmfn. expert, clever, skilful, knowing, learned (with locative case or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinmfn. good, virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinmfn. pure, pious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinmfn. obeying, doing what is enjoined View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinmfn. one who has attained an object or accomplished a purpose, satisfied etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinm. Name of a son of cyavana- and father of upari-cara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtinm. Name of a son of saṃnatimat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣatinmfn. wounded, injured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣatinmfn. (for kṣata-kāsin-) one who has a cough produced by an injury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitināgam. (equals -jantu-) a kind of snail or earth-worm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitinandam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitinandanam. (equals -ja-) Name of the planet Mars. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitinātham. "lord of the earth", a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumāraghātinm. the slayer of a boy or child View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntinandanafor kuntī-n- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
laghupātinm. "quickly flying", Name of a crow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lobhābhipātinmfn. hastening through eager desire, rushing greedily View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lohitapittinmfn. subject to hemorrhage, suffering from hemorrhage, (cr2. rakta-p-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokanāthacakravartinm. Name of a Scholiast View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokasīmātivartinmfn. passing beyond ordinary limits, extraordinary, supernatural View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madahastinīf. a species of karañja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhunighātinm. Name of viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyavartinmfn. being in the middle or between or among, middle, central View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyavartinm. a mediator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyavivartinmfn. equals -vartin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyavivartinmfn. impartial, a mediator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahācakravartinm. a great emperor or universal monarch ( mahācakravartitā ti-- f.the rank of a great emperor) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādevasarasvatīvedāntinm. Name of learned man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādevavedāntinm. Name of learned man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāgandhahastinm. Name of a very efficacious remedy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāhastinmfn. having large hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāśaktinyāsam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāśāntinirūpaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvratinmfn. practising the five fundamental duties of jaina-s, observing the rule of the pāśupata-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvratinm. a pāśupata-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvratinm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvratinm. a devotee, ascetic (equals joṭiṅga-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvratinm. equals uraskaṭa- (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣāsuraghātinīf. "slayer of the asura- mahiṣa-", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maṇḍalavartinm. the governor of a province, ruler of a small kingdom (see cakra-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
markaṭatindukam. a kind of ebony View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmaghātinmfn. equals -cchid- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matināram. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matināram. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matiniścayam. a firm opinion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mātṛghātin() m. a matricide. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mātṛvartinm. "behaving well to a mother", Name of a hunter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matsyaghātinmfn. killing fish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matsyaghātinm. a fisherman (also with puruṣa- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matsyavratinmfn. one who lives in water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mattadantinm. a furious or ruttish elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mattahastinm. equals -dantin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maunavratinmfn. () equals -vṛtti-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māyūravratinm. a member of a particular sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mīnaghātinm. "fish-killer", a fisherman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mīnaghātinm. a crane View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mīnāghātinm. equals mīna-gh- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mithunavratinmfn. devoted to cohabitation, practising copulation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛgaśṛṅgavratinm. plural Name of a Buddhistic sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūlavratinmfn. living exclusively on roots View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
munivratinmfn. one who eats eight mouthfuls View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrtatvajātinirākaraṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nabhaḥkrāntinm. "sky-walker"(from the lion-like shape of certain clouds), a lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgayajñopavītinmfn. () possessing it. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgopavītinmfn. equals naga-yajñlāp- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naikṛtin() mfn. dishonest, fallacious, low, vile. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nakṣatrapatinandanam. the planet Mercury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāmabibhratinmfn. bearing only the name View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nārāyaṇacakravartinm. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nartinmfn. dancing (see vaṃśa-n-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nātidūravartinmfn. nātidūra
tinīcamfn. not too low View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinirbhagnamfn. not too much bent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinirvṛttif. not too much ease View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
navīnavedāntinm. a modern vedānta- philosopher Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nideśavartinmfn. executing the orders of, obedient to (genitive case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigaditinmfn. one who has spoken gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nighātinmfn. striking down, killing, destroying (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nikaṭavartin() () mfn. id. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nikathitinmfn. (fr. ni-kathita-, kath-) gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nikṛntinmfn. tearing asunder (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nikṛtin() () mfn. dishonest, low, base, wicked. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimittanimittinmfn. operating and operated upon Scholiast or Commentator on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimittinmfn. operated on or influenced by a cause, having a cause or reason (see nimitta-n-above) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nipaṭhitinmfn. gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nipātinmfn. falling or flying down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nipātinmfn. falling or alighting on (compound ; upari- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nipātinmfn. striking down, destroying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirākṛtinmfn. making no show etc. equals -ākāra- (above) (varia lectio kṛti-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirākṛtinmfn. (for 1.See) one who has forgotten what he has learned (anirāk-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirākṛtinmfn. see gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirvartinmfn. accomplishing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') (varia lectio niv-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣāditinmfn. equals niṣāditam anena- gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinipuṇa() mfn. equals -kuśala-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiniṣṇa() mfn. equals -kuśala-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivartinmfn. turning back, retreating, fleeing (mostly a-niv- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivartinmfn. abstaining from (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivartinmfn. allowing or causing to return (a-niv-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivartinmfn. wrong reading for nir-v- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivītinmfn. wearing the thread round the neck in worshipping the ṛṣi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niyataviṣayavartinmfn. steadily abiding in one's own sphere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛpatinītigarbhitavṛttan. Name of a modern work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyavartinmfn. well behaved, acting with propriety View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padadyotinīf. Name of commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padātinmfn. having foot-soldiers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padātinmfn. going or being on foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padātinm. a foot-soldier View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pakṣapātinmfn. flying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pakṣapātinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' siding with, favouring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paktināśanamfn. spoiling digestion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
palitinmfn. grey-haired View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcagṛhitinmfn. one who has taken up 5 times , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcāvatttinmfn. one who offers oblations consisting of avadāna-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parabhūjātinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paranirmitavaśavartinm. "constantly enjoying pleasures provided by others", Name of a class of deities (see ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāpātinmfn. flying off, getting loose View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāvartinmfn. turning back, taking to flight (a-parāv-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parigaditinmfn. equals parigaditaṃ yena saḥ- gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parigaṇitinmfn. one who has well considered everything , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parighātinmfn. destroying, setting at nought, transgressing (a command etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parikalitinmfn. equals kalitaṃ yena saḥ- gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paripārśvavartinmfn. being at the side or near View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parirakṣitin gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritin gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parītinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') filled with, seized by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinmfn. moving round, revolving, ever-recurring etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') changing, passing into View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinmfn. being or remaining or staying in or near or about (locative case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinmfn. flying, retreating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinmfn. exchanging, requiting, recompensing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivartinf. (sc. vi-ṣṭuti-) a hymn arranged according to the recurring form abc-, abc- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivaśavartinm. plural Name of a class of gods in indra-'s world (see paranirmita v v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pārśvaparivartinmfn. being or going by the side of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pārśvavartinmfn. standing by the side, an attendant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pārśvavartinm. pl. attendants, retinue View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pārśvavivartinmfn. being by the side of, living with (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paścādvartinmfn. remaining behind, following after View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāśupatavratinm. a follower of śiva- paśu-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paśupatinagaran. " śiva-'s town", Name of kāśī- or Benares View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paśupatinātham. Name of a particular form of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
patighātinīf. the murderess of her husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. flying etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. falling, sinking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. rising, appearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. being in (see antaḥ--and eka--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. causing to fall, throwing down, emitting (compound)
pattinm. = patti-2, a foot-soldier, footman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pautināsikyan. fetor of the nostrils View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
phalguhastinīf. Name of a poetess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pīṭhaśaktinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. drinking, one who has drunk (See soma-p-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinm. a horse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitṛghātin() m. a parricide. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitṛvartinm. "staying with ancestors", Name of king brahma-datta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitṛvyaghātinm. the murderer of his father's brother View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitryupavītinmfn. invested with it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prācīnaāvītinmfn. equals vītin- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prācīnāpavītinmfn. equals vīt/in- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prācīnāvavītinmfn. equals vīt/in- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prācīnāvītinmfn. ( .) () wearing the sacred cord over the right shoulder. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prācīnāvītinopavītamfn. () wearing the sacred cord over the right shoulder. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradeśavartinmfn. equals -bhāj- ( pradeśavartitvā ti-tvā- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradyotinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') illustrating, explaining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajāpatinivāsinīf. Name of a gandharvī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakṛtiniṣṭhuramfn. naturally hard or cruel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāṇighātinmfn. killing living beings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praṇipātinmfn. falling at a person's feet, submissive, humble View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prapātinm. a rock, cliff, mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamaparāpātinmfn. flying off first View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratibimbavartinmfn. being reflected or mirrored View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidantinm. equals -kuñjara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratighātinmfn. keeping off, repulsing, disturbing, injuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratighātinmfn. dazzling (netra--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratīghātinmfn. in a-pratighāti-- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratihastinm. the keeper of a brothel (Scholiast or Commentator"a neighbour") . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratikūlapravartinmfn. (a ship) taking an adverse course or (tongue) causing unpleasantness (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratikūlavartinmfn. being adverse to, disturbing, troubling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinadP. -nadati-, to sound back, answer with a cry or shout etc.: Causal -nādayati-, to cause to resound, make resonant, fill with cries View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinādam. echo, reverberation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinadiind. at every river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināḍīf. a branch vein View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināditamfn. (fr. Causal) filled with sounds, resonant, echoing or echoed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināgam. equals -kuñjara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinagaramind. in every town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināha( nah-) See karṇapr- and see pratī-nāha- under 1. pratī-, p.673. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinam(only perfect tense -nānāma-), to bow or incline towards (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināma(pr/ati--) ind. by name, mentioning the name View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināmagrahaṇam(pr/ati--) ind. mentioning each individual name View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināman(pr/ati--) mf(minī-)n. having corresponding names, related by name View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinamaskāramfn. one who returns a salutation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinandP. -nandati-, to greet cheerfully, salute (also in return), bid welcome or farewell, address kindly, favour, befriend etc. ; to receive joyfully or thankfully, to accept willingly (with na-,to decline, refuse, reject) etc.: Causal -nandayati-, to gladden, delight, gratify View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinandam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinandanan. greeting, salutation, friendly acceptance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinandanan. thanksgiving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinanditamfn. saluted or accepted kindly or cheerfully View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinaptṛm. a great grandson, a son's grandson (see praṇapāt-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinardP. A1. -nardati-, te-, to roar or cry against or after (food), greet or hail with cries View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinārīf. a female rival View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinavamfn. new, young, fresh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinavajavāpuṣpan. a newly opened China rose View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināyakam. "counter hero", the adversary of the hero (in a play) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināyakam. an image, likeness, counterfeit, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināyakaSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinayana(in the beginning of a compound), into the eye View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinīP. -nayati-, to lead towards or back etc. ; to put into, mix View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhāP. -dadhāti-, to put in the place of another, substitute ; to order, command ; to slight, disregard
pratinidhāpayitavyamfn. to be caused to be substituted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhātavyamfn. to be substituted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidheyamfn. to be substituted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhim. substitution View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhim. a substitute, representative, proxy, surety etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhim. a resemblance of a real form, an image, likeness, statue, picture View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinidhim. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') an image of id est similar, like (dhī-kṛ-,to substitute anything [ accusative ] for [ compound ] ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātinidhikam. (fr. -nidhi-) a substitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinigadP. -gadati-, to speak to, address ; to recite or repeat singly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinigrahA1. -gṛhṇīte-, to take up (liquids), ladle out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinigrāhyamfn. to be ladled out (see nirgr-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinihan(only 2. Persian perfect tense -jagh/antha-), to aim a blow at (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinihatamfn. hit, slain, killed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniḥsargam. giving back, abandonment (wrong reading niḥsaṅga-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniḥsṛjP. -sṛjati-, to drive towards, give up to (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniḥsṛjyamfn. to be given up or abandoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniḥsṛṣṭamfn. driven away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinikṣipP. -kṣipati-, to put down or deposit again View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratininadam. equals nāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinindP. -nindati-, to abuse, blame, censure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinipātam. ( pat-) falling down, alighting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirasP. -asyati-, to throw back View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdeśam. a reference back to (with genitive case), renewed mention View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdeśakamfn. pointing or referring back (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdeśyamfn. referred to or mentioned again View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdiś(only Passive voice -diśyate-), to point or refer back on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdiṣṭamfn. referred to again View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirgrāhyamfn. ( grah-) to be taken up with a ladle (see prati-nigr-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirjitamfn. ( ji-) appropriated, turned to one's own advantage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirvapP. -vapati-, to distribute in return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniryāP. -yāti-, to come forth again View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniryatCaus. -yātayati-, to give back, return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniryātanan. giving back, returning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniryātanan. rewarding, retaliation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniśamind. every night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniścayam. a contrary opinion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniṣkam. or n. (?) a niṣka- (sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) in each case View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniṣkrayam. ( krī-) retaliation, retribution View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniṣpūP. -punāti-, to cleanse or winnow again, purify View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniṣpūtamfn. cleansed, winnowed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniṣṭhamfn. standing on the opposite side View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinistṝP. -tarati-, to accomplish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivāraṇan. (1. vṛ-) keeping off, warding off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivartanan. returning, coming back (See punaḥ-pr-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivartitamfn. (fr. Causal) caused to return, led back View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivāsanan. (4. vas-) a kind of garment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniveśam. obstinacy, obdurateness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniviṣṭamfn. ( viś-) quite prepossessed with (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniviṣṭamfn. obstinate, obdurate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniviṣṭamūrkham. an obstinate fool View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivṛtA1. -vartate- (P.2. plural future -vartsyatha- ), to turn back or round, return etc. ; to turn away from (ablative), escape, run away, take flight ; to cease, be allayed or abated : Causal -vartayati-, to cause to go back, turn back, avert View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivṛttamfn. turned back or from (ablative), come back, return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinivṛttif. coming back, return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniyamam. a strict rule as to applying an example to particular persons or things only View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiniyatamfn. ( yam-) fixed or adopted for each single case, particular or different for each case View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinodam. thrusting back, repulse (see /a-pr-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinṛpatim. equals -kṣoṇibhṛt- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinṛtP. -nṛtyati-, to dance before (in token of contempt), mock in turn by dancing before (accusative) : Intensive -narnṛtīti-, to dance before (in token of love), delight or gladden by dancing before (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinuP. -nauti-, to commend, approve View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinudP. A1. -nudati-, te-, to thrust back, repulse, ward off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyāgamP. -gacchati-, to come back, return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyas(only ind.p. -nyasya-), to place apart or lay down separately (for different persons) deposit (varia lectio pra-vi-n-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyāsaa counter deposit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyāsaSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyāyamind. in inverted order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyūṅkham. a corresponding insertion of the vowel o- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinyūṅkhayaNom. yati-, to insert the vowel o- in the corresponding stanza or verse
pratipattiniṣṭhuramfn. difficult to be understood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiyogyanadhikaraṇenāśasyotpattinirāsam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyaṅgavartinmfn. occupying one's self with one's own person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. issuing, streaming forth, forth, moving onwards, flowing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. active, restless, unsteady (a-prativ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. causing to flow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. causing, effecting, Producing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. using, employing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinmfn. introducing, propagating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravartinf. Name of a jaina- nun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravītinmfn. ( vye-) having the sacred thread hanging down the back (see upa-vītin-, ni-vītin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravṛttinimittan. the reason for the use of any term in the particular significations which it bears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravṛttinivṛttimatmfn. connected with activity and inactivity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāyaścittinmfn. one who does penance or has to make expiation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pṛṣṭhapātinmfn. being behind a person's back, following, watching, observing, controlling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punaḥpratinivartanan. coming back again, return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punarāvartinmfn. returning (to mundane existence) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punarāvartinmfn. leading back (to mundane existence) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punarāvartinmfn. subject to successive births View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purovartinmfn. being before a person's eyes, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purovartinmfn. forward, obtrusive on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrtinmfn. possessing the merit of pious liberality (see pūrta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrtinmfn. filling, completing, effective View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvavartinmfn. existing before, preceding, prior, previous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tināsāgadam. idem or 'n. a disease of the nose causing offensive breath (wrong reading pūta-n-).' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tināsikamfn. having a fetid nose View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinasyan. a disease of the nose causing offensive breath (wrong reading pūta-n-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
putrapratinidhim. a substitute for a son (as an adopted son etc.), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raghupratinidhim. an image or counterpart of raghu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājahastinm. a royal elephant, excellent elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktapitttinmfn. subject to or suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmāṣṭaviṃśatināmastotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmavratinm. plural Name of a particular school View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raṇahastinm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
randhropanipātinmfn. rushing in through holes or weak places (said of misfortunes) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rantināra m. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinmfn. containing gifts or oblations (as a sacrificial ladle) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratināgam. a kind of coitus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ravisaṃkrāntinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
retaḥpātinmfn. discharging semen, having sexual intercourse with (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
retinmfn. abounding in seed, prolific, impregnating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ripughātinmfn. slaying an enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ripughātinīf. Abrus Precatorius View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ripunipātinmfn. causing an enemy to fall, destroying a foe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rudravratinm. a kṣatriya- who stands on one foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rūpanārāyaṇacakravartinm. Name of man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdapātinmfn. aiming or hitting at any object by the mere sounds (without seeing it) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdapātinmfn. falling with a sounds = View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sacchalajātinigrahamayamf(ī-)n. consisting of defeat (in disputation) accompanied by self-refuting objections and unfair arguments View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadyaḥpātinmfn. quickly falling or dropping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahadīkṣitinmfn. undertaking the dīkṣā- (q.v) together, , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāhasaikāntarasānuvartinmfn. one who follows or yields to the one passion of cruelty or rashness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasraghātinmfn. killing a thousand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasraghātinn. a particular engine of war View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahavartinmfn. being together, keeping company View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saikatinmfn. having sandbanks or sandy shores View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakradantinm. indra-'s elephant (called airāvata-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktinmfn. (prob.) furnished with a flag-staff (see ratha-śakti-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktinm. Name of a man (equals śakti-,m.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktinātham. "lord of śakti-", Name of śiva-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaktinyāsam. Name of a Tantric work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samagravartinmfn. entirely resting or fixed upon (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samanuvartinmfn. obedient, willing, devoted to (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samasamayavartinmfn. simultaneous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavartinmfn. being equal, being of a fair or impartial disposition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavartinmfn. acting uniformly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavartinmfn. being equidistant (bāṇa-pāta-s-,"being equidistant with an arrow-shot") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavartinm. Name of yama- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāvartinmfn. idem or 'mfn. (pr.p.) returning from the home of a preceptor ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samayānuvartinmfn. following established rules, observant of duties View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sambādhavartinmfn. (plural) moving in dense crowds, jostling or crowding together on a road View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃgatinmfn. come together, met, assembled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samīpataravartinmfn. being nearer at hand, neighbouring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samīpavartinmfn. being near, living near etc., View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkalitinmfn. one who has made an addition (with locative case) gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃkhyayogapravartinm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkrāntinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃnidhivartinmfn. being near, neighbouring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃnipātinmfn. falling together, meeting ( saṃnipātitva ti-tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃnipātinmfn. furthering or promoting immediately View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃnipātinmfn. (equals saṃ-n-) falling together, meeting ( sāṃnipātitva ti-tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampātinmfn. flying together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampātinmfn. flying as rivals (="equally swift") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampātinmfn. falling down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampātinmfn. Name of a fabulous bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampātinmfn. of a rākṣasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampratinandP. -nandati-, to greet or welcome gladly (See next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampratinanditamfn. greeted joyfully, welcomed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampravartinmfn. putting in order, setting right View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃrakṣitinmfn. one who has guarded etc. (with locative case) gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samudghātinSee vimati-s-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvatsarabhṛtinmfn. one who has maintained (a sacrificial fire) for a year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvītinmfn. girt with the sacred thread View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃyatinSee under saṃ-. yam-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃyatinmfn. controlling, restraining (the senses) (prob. wrong reading for saṃ-yamin-below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṅkhāntaradyotinmfn. shining in the forehead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṇmukhavṛttinighaṇṭum. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntinātham. Name of an arhat- (with jaina-s; equals śānti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntināthacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntināthapurāṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptasaptinmfn. each consisting of 7 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptavibhaktinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptinmfn. (for 2.See under sapti-below) containing 7 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptinm. the 7-partite stoma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptinmfn. (only f. saptinī-formed in analogy to vājinī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaraṇāgatagātinm. the slayer of a suppliant for protection () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarpaghātinīf. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvadharmopravṛttinirdeśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaśaghātin() m. "hare-killer", a hawk. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sasampātinmfn. together with (the rākṣasa-) sampātin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāsanavartinmfn. obeying the orders of (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatapātinmfn. (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatatinm. Name of a son of raja- or rajas- (, śata-jit-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatāvartinm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatinmfn. consisting of hundreds, hundredfold ( śatinībhis nībhis- ind."in a hundred manners", ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatinmfn. possessing a hundred (with gavām-,"cows") (see go-śatin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śātinmfn. cut off (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatinībhisind. śatin
śatrughātinm. "id.", Name of a son of śatrughna- (son of daśa-ratha-)
savratinmfn. acting in like manner or having the same customs with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntinm. one who establishes or proves his conclusions logically, one learned in scientific text-books View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntinm. equals mīmāṃsaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śīghrapātinmfn. flying or moving or acting quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmantinmfn. parted (as hair) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmantinmfn. wearing the hair parted (as a pregnant woman) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmantinīf. a woman etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmantinīf. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śirovartinmfn. being at the head, being on the top or summit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śirovartinmfn. equals śiropasthāyin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śirovartinm. a chief. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śīrṣaghātinm. "one who beheads", an executioner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitayajñopavītinmfn. invested with a white sacred thread View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śitinasmfn. white-nosed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītkṛtinmfn. equals -kārin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivavratinm. a Brahman engaged in a vow of standing on one foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śmaśānavartinmfn. abiding in burning grounds, a ghost, spectre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śmaśruyajñopavītinmfn. wearing a beard and invested with the sacred thread View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smṛtinibandham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
snātakavratinmfn. fulfilling the vows and duties of a snātaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somapītinmfn. drinking soma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somasiddhāntinm. a follower of the above system View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śoṇitinSee vāta-ś-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīhastinīf. the sunflower, Heliotroplum Indicum (so called as held in the hand of śrī- or lakṣmī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutinmfn. one who has heard gaRa iṣṭādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutinmfn. obeying, observing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutinmfn. having or following the veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutinidarśanan. veda--demonstration, testimony of the veda--demonstration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutinigadinmfn. equals śruta-n- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
strībālaghātinm. a murderer of women and children View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
strīliṅgavartinmfn. strīliṅga
sucaritinmfn. well-conducted, moral, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucintitacintinmfn. thinking quite well or right View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suhastinm. Name of a jaina- teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukṛtinmfn. doing good actions, virtuous, generous ( sukṛtitva ti-tva- n.) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukṛtinmfn. prosperous, fortunate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukṛtinmfn. cultivated, wise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukṛtinm. Name of one of the 7 ṛṣi-s under the 10th manu-
śumbhaghātinīf. " śumbha--killing", Name of durgā-
sutāsutinmfn. having what is and what is not extracted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutinmfn. having a son or sons (inī- f."a mother") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutintiḍā f. Tamarindus Indica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutintiḍīf. Tamarindus Indica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvarṇacakravartinm. "one who sets a golden wheel in motion", a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svadharmavartinmfn. applying one's self to one's duties ( svadharmavartitva ti-tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svairavartinmfn. acting as one likes, following one's own inclinations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svapratinidhim. a substitute for one's self ( svapratinidhitvena -tvena- ind.instead of him, her, them etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svapratinidhitvenaind. svapratinidhi
svardantinm. a celestial elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaropaghātinmfn. suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvavṛttinmfn. living on dog View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayaṃkṛtinmfn. acting spontaneously View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetahastinm. a white elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetahastinm. Name of airāvata- (elephant of indra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taijasāvartinīf. a crucible View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tilavratinmfn. fasting by eating only sesamum-seeds Va1rtt. 3 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tilavratinmfn. see lodara-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
timighātinm. "fish-killer", a fisherman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiryaggatimatinn. an animal, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiryagghātinmfn. striking obliquely (an elephant) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiryakpātinmfn. falling obliquely on (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tretinīf. the threefold flame of the 3 fires of the altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tripuraghātinm. "destroyer of tripura-", śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchāstravartin(ud-śā-) mfn. deviating from or transgressing the law-books View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udāvartinmfn. suffering from disease of the bowels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddyotinmfn. shining upwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udghātinmfn. having elevations, uneven, rough (varia lectio for ut-khātin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udvartinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' rubbing or kneading with. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uñchavartin mfn. one who lives by gleaning, a gleaner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmārgavartinmfn. going on a wrong road, going wrong, erring (literally and figuratively) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unnītinmfn. one who has drawn out or filled up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaghātinmfn. one who does damage, hurting, injuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upakṛtinmfn. one who has done or does a favour, a helper etc. gaRa iṣṭādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upākṛtinmfn. one who prepares or begins gaRa iṣṭādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upanipātinmfn. rushing in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upanipātinmfn. attacking suddenly. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapātinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' falling to, hastening towards. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāsāditinmfn. one who has met or approached View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upasadvratinmfn. performing the above observance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaśāntinmfn. appeased, tranquil, calm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaśāntinmfn. tame View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaśāntinm. a tame elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upavāsavratinmfn. one who observes a vow of fasting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaveṣṭitinmfn. one who has wrapped himself round the loins in a cloth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upavītinmfn. wearing the sacred cord in the usual manner (over the left shoulder and under the right arm) (see yajñopavītin-.)
ūrdhvaraktinmfn. one whose blood rises towards the head View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkhātinmfn. having cavities or holes, uneven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkhātinmfn. destructive. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkrāntinmfn. passing, passing away, gone, departed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpatinmfn. flying up, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpātinmfn. flying up, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiyākaraṇahastinm. an elephant given to a grammarian as a reward View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśanartinm. "family-dancer", a buffoon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśavartinm. a particular class of gods in the third manv-antara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanavartinmfn. residing in the forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṣaśatinmfn. 100 years old View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. abiding, staying, resting, living or situated in (mostly compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') being in any position or condition, engaged in, practising, performing etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. obeying, executing (an order; see nideśa-v-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. conducting one's self, behaving, acting etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') behaving properly towards (see guru-v-; guru-vat- equals gurāv iva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinmfn. turning, moving, going View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vartinm. the meaning of an affix (equals pratyayārtha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinmfn. being under the control of, acting obediently to the will of, obsequious, subject (with genitive case or compound). etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') having power over, ruling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinmfn. having power over all, too powerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinm. of a Brahman or mahā--Brahman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśavartinm. sg. (scilicet gaṇa-) or plural a particular class of gods in the third manv-antara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātaśoṇitinmfn. suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntinm. a follower of the vedānta- philosophy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedavratinmfn. idem or 'm. (or -vratānāṃ-vidhi-) Name of a pariśiṣṭa- of kātyāyana-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veṣṭitinmfn. wearing a turban View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vibhaktinSee a-vibhaktin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidheyavartinmfn. submissive to another's will, obedient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidyācakravartinm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidyādharacakravartinm. a supreme lord of the vidyā-dhara-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidyādharamahācakravartinm. the paramount lord of all fairy-like beings ( vidyādharamahācakravartitā ti-- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidyotinmfn. irradiating, illustrating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vighātinmfn. fighting, slaying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vighātinmfn. hurting, injuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vighātinmfn. opposing, impeding, preventing, interrupting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijitinmfn. victorious, triumphant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimatisamudghātinm. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinipātinSee a-vin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinivartinSee a-vinivartin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣaghātinmfn. poison-destroying, antidotal, an antidote View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣaghātinm. Mimosa Sirissa (equals śirīṣa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣatindum. Strychnos Nux Vomica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣatindum. a kind of ebony tree with poisonous fruit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣatindukam. a species of poisonous plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣayavartinmfn. directed to anything (genitive case) as an object View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvāsaghātinmfn. one who destroys confidence, a traitor etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvastaghātinmfn. ruining the trustful () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tinm. Name of a man (plural his family) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivartinmfn. turning round, rolling, revolving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivartinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') turning toward View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivartinmfn. changing, undergoing a change View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivartinmfn. dwelling, abiding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinmfn. observing a vow, engaged in a religious observance etc. etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') engaged in, worshipping, behaving like View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinm. an ascetic, devotee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinm. a religious student View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinm. one who institutes a sacrifice and employs priests (equals yajamāna-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinm. Name of a muni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratinīf. a nun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttānuvartinmfn. conforming to rule, obedient, virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttin(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') equals vṛtti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttinibandhanan. means of support View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttinirodham. obstruction or prevention of activity or function View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāghātaghātinmfn. idem or 'mfn. striking against, thwarting, opposing, resisting ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyākulitinmfn. = vyākulitam anena- gaRa iṣṭādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāptinirūpaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāptiniścayam. (in logic) the ascertainment of pervading inherence or universal concomitance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatinīP. -nayati-, to let pass (time) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyavasāyavartinmfn. acting resolutely, resolute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyavasthātivartinmfn. transgressing the law, breaking an agreement or contract View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāyatapātinmfn. running far and wide (as horses) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajñopavītinmfn. idem or 'mfn. invested with the sacrifice thread ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantrahastinm. an automatic elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatinm. an ascetic, devotee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatinīf. a widow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatinṛtyan. a kind of dance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvadgṛhītinmfn. as often as one has taken or ladled out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvakavratinmfn. living only on the grains of barley found in cow-dung View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuddhānivartinmfn. not turning the back (in battle), heroic, valiant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
Results for tin103 results
tindukam तिन्दुकम् की The fruit of the ebony tree. -कम् A kind of measure (कर्ष).
tiniśaḥ तिनिशः A particular tree; दात्यूहैस्तिनिशस्य कोटरवति स्कन्धे निलीय स्थितम् Māl.9.7. तिन्तिडः tintiḍḥ डी ḍī तिन्तिडिका tintiḍikā तिन्तिडीकाः tintiḍīkāḥ तिन्तिडः डी तिन्तिडिका तिन्तिडीकाः 1 The tamarind tree. -2 A sour sauce (made of its fruits); Bṛi.S.55.21. -कम् 1 The fruit of the tamarind. -2 A sour sauce. तिन्तिली tintilī तिन्तिलि tintili (ली lī) का kā तिन्तिली तिन्तिलि (ली) का The tamarind tree. तिन्दुः tinduḥ तिन्दुकः tindukḥ तिन्दुलः tindulḥ तिन्दुः तिन्दुकः तिन्दुलः N. of a tree.
akṛtin अकृतिन् a. [न. त.] Not skilful or clever, clumsy, awkward; unfit for doing anything.
atināman अतिनामन् N. of a ṛiṣi of the Saptarṣi group of the sixth Manvantara.
atināṣṭra अतिनाष्ट्र a. Ved. Out of danger. अतिनिचृ _x001F_3(वृ) त् f. N. of a Vedic metre of 3 Pādas, the number of syllables in each being respectively 7, 6 and 7; (षट्कः सप्तकयोर्मध्ये स्तोतॄणां विवाचीति । यस्याः सातिनिवृन्नाम गायत्री द्विदशाक्षरा).
atinidrā अतिनिद्रा Excessive sleeping. -द्र a. 1 Given to excessive sleep. -2 Without sleep, sleepless. -द्रम् ind. Past sleeping time (निद्रा सम्प्रति न युज्यते).
atinirhārin अतिनिर्हारिन् a. Very attractive (as an attributive of smell); आमोदः सो$तिनिर्हारी Ak.
atinau अतिनौ नु a. [अतिक्रान्तो नावम्] Disembarked, landed.
atipātin अतिपातिन् a. 1 Acute, running a rapid course. -2 Surpassing in speed, swifter than (in comp.); ततार विद्याः पवनातिपातिभिर्दिशो हरिद्भिर्हरिताभिवेश्वरः R.3.3. अतिपाति कार्यमिदम् । पञ्चरात्रम् 2.
ativartin अतिवर्तिन् a. 1 Crossing, surpassing, excelling; भुवनातिवर्तिना ओजसा Ki.12.21; passing, overstepping, transgressing, violating &c. Bhāg.6.17.12. -2 Excessive. -3 Foremost.
adhītin अधीतिन् a. [अधीतमनेन; अधीत-इनि] well-read, proficient in (with loc.) अधीती चतुर्ष्वाम्रायेषु Dk.12; वेदे, व्याकरणे &c.; त्वगुत्तरासङ्गवतीमधीतिनीम् Ku.5.16 muttering holy prayers, engaged in repeating sacred texts.
anāvartin अनावर्तिन् a. Not recurring or returning; ˚र्ती कालो व्रजति स वृथा तन्न गणितम् Bh.3.115.
anivartin अनिवर्तिन् a. 1 Brave, not retreating; also an epithet of Viṣṇu and the Almighty God. -2 Not returning; यौवनमनिवर्ति यातं तु K. P.1. -3 Non-recurring (account); आवर्तको$निवर्ती च व्ययायौ तु पृथग् द्विधा Śukra-Nīti.2.339.
anupaṭhitin अनुपठितिन् a. Who has read through, proficient.
anupātin अनुपातिन् a. Following as a result. -m. A follower; मदनुपातिनामेष पन्थाः Dk.168.
anupavītin अनुपवीतिन् m. One who does not wear the sacred thread (belonging to his caste).
anuyuktin अनुयुक्तिन् q. [अस्त्यर्थे इनि] One who has ordered, examined; cf. गृहीतिन्, अधीतिन्.
anuvartin अनुवर्तिन् a. 1 Following, obeying, conforming to, with acc. or in comp.; कश्च लक्ष्मणमुक्तानां रामकोपानुवर्तिनाम् । शराणामग्रतः स्थातुं शक्तो देवासुरेष्वपि ॥ Rām.5.51.19. राक्षसा- श्चापि गृह्यन्ते नित्यं छन्दानुवर्तिभिः Pt.1.69; नराधिपा नीचजनानु- वर्तिनः 1.383. -2 Guided by, following the advice of; obedient, faithful, compliant; अनुवर्तिनि कलत्रे Pt.1.11, भृत्यानामनुवर्तिनाम् 298. -3 Like, resembling, worthy.
apaghātin अपघातिन् a. Killing, murdering.
abhikrāntin अभिक्रान्तिन् a. [इष्टादिगण] 1 One who has approached or undertaken or begun. -2 Skilled or versed in, conversant with (with loc.).
abhimātin अभिमातिन् a. [मे-क्त, इष्टादिभ्यः इन्] 1 Insidious; बाधन्ते विश्वमभिमातिनम् Rv.1.85.3. -2 One who hurts or injures, an enemy.
abhivartin अभिवर्तिन् a. Going towards, approaching, attacking &c.
abhighātin अभिघातिन् Striking, hurting. m. An enemy; assilant.
abhyāghātin अभ्याघातिन् a. Attacking.
abhyāvartin अभ्यावर्तिन् a. Recurring; आत्मीयास्ते ये पराञ्चः पुरस्ता- दभ्यावर्ती संमुखो यः परो$सौ Śi.18.18.
ayatin अयतिन् a. Of unsubdued desires or passions, incontinent.
arcitin अर्चितिन् a. Honouring, adoring.
arditin अर्दितिन् a. [अर्दितमस्त्यस्य-ईनि] Suffering from the spasms of jaw-bones.
āpātin आपातिन् a. Falling on, attacking, descending, happening.
āmnātin आम्नातिन् a. [आम्नात-इनि] One who has studied the Vedas; आम्नातिनी नीतिषु वुद्धिमद्भिः Bk.
āvītin आवीतिन् m. [आवीत-इनि] A Brāhmaṇa who makes the sacrificial cord hang over the right shoulder.
āvartin आवर्तिन् a. 1 Whirling or turning upon itself, returning; आब्रह्मभुवनाल्लोकाः पुनरावर्तिनो$र्जुन Bg.8.16; कालान्तरा- वर्ति H.1.18. -2 Melting, mixing &c. m. (-र्ती) A horse having curls of hair on various parts of the body (considered as a sign of auspiciousness). -नी 1 A whirlpool. -2 N. of a plant (अजशृङ्गी).
utkrāntin उत्क्रान्तिन् a. passing away, gone, departed.
utkhātin उत्खातिन् (उत्खात-इनि) 1 Uneven, having ups and downs, rugged (opp. सम). उत्खातिनी भूमिरिति मया रश्मि- संयमनाद्रथस्य मन्दीकृतो वेगः Ś.1. -2 Destructive.
udghātin उद्घातिन् a. Uneven, rough.
udghātin उद्घातिन् a. Having ups and downs. उद्घातिनी भूमि- रिति मया संयमिता अश्वाः Ś1.
upanipātin उपनिपातिन् a. Coming (unexpectedly); रन्ध्रोपनि- पातिनो$नर्थाः Ś.6.
upavītin उपवीतिन् a. Wearing the sacred thread. उद्धृते दक्षिणे पाणावुपवीत्युच्यते द्विजः Ms.2.63.
kirātinī किरातिनी f. N. of a plant (जटामांसी).
kṛtin कृतिन् a. [कृतमनेन, कृत-इनि] 1 One who has done his work or gained his end, satisfied, contented, happy, successful; यस्य वीर्येण कृतिनो वयं च भुवनानि च U.1.32; न खल्वनिर्जित्य रघुं कृती भवान् R.3.51;12,64. -2 (Hence) Lucky, fortunate, blessed; Ś.1.23;7.19. -3 Clever, competent, able, expert, skilful, wise, learned; तं क्षुरप्र- शकलीकृतं कृती R.11.29,19.14; Ku.2.1; Ki.2.9; Śi.2.25,3; H.3.89; Ve.4.12. -4 Good, virtuous, pure, pious; तावदेव कृतिनामपि स्फुरत्येष निर्मलविवेकदीपकः Bh. 1.56. -5 Following, obeying, doing what is enjoined.
gaṇitin गणितिन् m. One who has made a calculation. -2 A mathematician.
tin गीतिन् a. (-नी f.) One who recites in a singing manner; गीती शीघ्री शिरःकम्पी तथा लिखितपाठकः Śik.32.
gṛhītin गृहीतिन् a. Who has grasped or comprehended (with loc.); गृहीती षट्स्वङ्गेषु Dk.12.
ghātin घातिन् a. (-नी f.) [इन् णिच् णिनि] 1 Striking, killing ये च स्त्रीबालघातिनः Ms.8.89. -2 Catching or killing (birds &c.) -3 Destructive. -Comp. -पक्षिन्, -विहगः a hawk falcon.
ghṛtin घृतिन् a. Containing ghee.
cittin चित्तिन् a. Ved. Intelligent, wise.
dyotin द्योतिन् a. Splendid, bright.
dvaitin द्वैतिन् m. A philosopher who maintains the dvaita doctrine.
nikṛtin निकृतिन् a. Base, dishonest, wicked.
nipātin निपातिन् a. Falling down, alighting; कुसुमपङ्क्तिनिपाति- भिरङ्कितः R.9.41. -2 Destroyed, decayed. -3 Destroying; ज्योतिरिन्धननिपाति भास्करात् R.11.21.
nimittin निमित्तिन् a. Having a cause, influenced by (some cause or ground).
nirvartin निर्वर्तिन् a. 1 Completing, accomplishing &c. -2 Acting rudely, uncivil, impolitic.
nivītin निवीतिन् a. Wearing the sacred thread round the neck (like a garland); उद्धृते दक्षिणे पाणावुपवीत्युच्यते द्विजः । सव्ये तु प्राचीनावीती निवीती कण्ठसज्जने ॥ Ms.2.63.
nivartin निवर्तिन् a. 1 Turning back, flying from, returning. -2 Desisting or abstaining from. -3 Allowing to return or turn back.
pattin पत्तिन् m. A foot-soldier, foot-man.
padātin पदातिन् a. 1 Having foot-soldiers (as an army). -2 Being or going on foot. -m. A foot-soldier. पदातिकः padātikḥ पदातीयः padātīyḥ पदातिकः पदातीयः 1 A foot-man. -2 A peon.
parivartin परिवर्तिन् a. 1 Moving or turning round, revolving. -2 Ever-recurring, coming round again and again; परिवर्तिनि संसारे मृतः को वा न जायते Pt.1.27. -3 Changing. -4 Being or remaining near, moving round about. -5 Retreating, flying. -6 Exchanging. -7 Recompensing, requiting.
palitin पलितिन् a. Grey-haired.
tin पातिन् a. (-नी f.) [पत्-णिनि] 1 Going to, descending, alighting on. -2 Falling, sinking. -3 Being contained in. -4 Felling or throwing down. -5 Pouring forth, discharging, emitting.
tin पीतिन् m. A horse.
pautināsikyam पौतिनासिक्यम् Fetor of the nostrils; Ms.11.5.
pratinad प्रतिनद् 1 P. 1 To resound, echo. -2 To answer with a shout. -Caus. To fill with noise, make resonant; Śānti.2.17; स्वस्थस्थिताण्डजकुलप्रतिनादितानि (उपवनानि) Ṛs.3.14.
pratinādaḥ प्रतिनादः An echo, a reverberation (also प्रतिनिनदः in this sense).
pratinādita प्रतिनादित a. Resounding, echoing.
pratinand प्रतिनन्द् 1 P. 1 To bless; तौ गुरुर्गुरुपत्नी च प्रीत्या प्रति- ननन्दतुः R.1.57; Ms.7.146; Ku.7.87. -2 To welcome, congratulate, hail with joy, receive gladly; प्रतिनन्द्य स तां पूजाम् Mb.; Ms.2.54. -3 To acccept cheerfully; भर्तुः प्रसादं प्रतिनन्द्य मूर्ध्ना Ku.3.2. -4 To address kindly; show devotion. -Caus. To delight, gratify.
pratinandanam प्रतिनन्दनम् 1 Congratulating, welcoming. -2 Thanks giving.
pratinidhā प्रतिनिधा 3 U. 1 To substitute, put in the place of. -2 To slight, disregard. -3 To order.
pratinidhiḥ प्रतिनिधिः 1 A representative, substitute; सो$भवत् प्रतिनिधिर्न कर्मणा R.11.13;1.81;4.54;5,63;9.4. अल्लीशाहात् प्रतिनिधिं तस्य शैलस्य सर्वथा Śiva B.28.4. -2 A deputy, vicegerent. -3 Substitution. -4 A surety. -5 An image, likeness, picture.
pratinipātaḥ प्रतिनिपातः Falling down, alighting.
pratiniyata प्रतिनियत a. 1 Settled, predestined; विधिर्वन्द्यः सो$पि प्रतिनियतकर्मैकफलदः Bh.2.94. -2 Firm, unshakable; विपक्षाणां हेतीः प्रतिनियतधैर्यानुभवतः Mv.6.34.
pratiniyamaḥ प्रतिनियमः 1 A general rule. -2 A separate allotment; जननमरणकरणानां प्रतिनियमाद्युगपत् प्रवृत्तेश्च Sāṅ. K.18. -3 A strict rule applying only to a particular case.
pratinirjita प्रतिनिर्जित p. p. 1 Vanquished, subdued. -2 Rescinded.
pratinirdeśya प्रतिनिर्देश्य a. That which, though before expressed, is repeated in order to state something more about it; cf. the instance given in K. P.7; उदेति सविता ताम्रस्ताम्र एवास्तमेति च, where ताम्र is repeated to show that the sun that rises red sets also red.
pratiniryātanam प्रतिनिर्यातनम् 1 Retribution, retaliation. -2 Returning, giving back.
pratiniviṣṭa प्रतिनिविष्ट a. Perverse, obstinate, hardened. -Comp. -मूर्खः a perverse fool, confirmed blockhead; न तु प्रति निविष्टमूर्खजनचित्तमाराधयेत् Bh.2.5.
pratiniveśaḥ प्रतिनिवेशः Obstinacy, obdurateness.
pratinivartanam प्रतिनिवर्तनम् Returning, return. -2 Turning away from.
pratiniṣkrayaḥ प्रतिनिष्क्रयः Retaliation, retribution.
pratiniṣpūta प्रतिनिष्पूत p. p. Cleansed, winnowed.
pratinud प्रतिनुद् 6 U. To ward off, repel, repulse.
pratinodaḥ प्रतिनोदः Repelling, repulse.
prapātin प्रपातिन् m. A precipitous mountain, cliff.
pravartin प्रवर्तिन् a. 1 Proceeding, moving onward. -2 Being active. -3 Causing, effecting. -4 Using. -5 Arising from, flowing; Ś.3.14. -6 Spreading &c.
prātinidhikaḥ प्रातिनिधिकः A substitute; Kāty. ŚS.
prāyaścittin प्रायश्चित्तिन् a. One who makes an atonement.
bāhudantin बाहुदन्तिन् m., बाहुदन्तेयः An epithet of Indra.
yatin यतिन् m. An ascetic.
yatinī यतिनी A widow; विधवा ...... विश्वस्ता यतिनी यतिः Śabdaratnāvali.
vartin वर्तिन् a. (-नी f.) [वृत्-णिनि] (Usually at the end of comp.) 1 Abiding, being, resting, staying, situated. -2 Going, moving, turning. -3 Acting, behaving. -4 Performing, practising. -5 Obeying, executing (an order). -m The meaning of an affix.
śatin शतिन् a. 1 A hundred-fold. -2 Numerous. -m. The owner of a hundred; निस्वो वष्टि शतं शती दशशतम् Śā. 2.6; इच्छति शती सहस्रं सहस्री लक्षमीहते Pt.5.82.
saṃkalitin संकलितिन् a. One who has made an addition.
saṃnipātin संनिपातिन् a. A subsidiary that serves the purpose of the प्रधानकर्म by being closely connected with it or directly related (see सामवायिक a.); मन्त्राश्च संनिपातित्वात् MS.12.1.19.
samanuvartin समनुवर्तिन् a. Obedient, devoted.
saṃpātin संपातिन् a. 1 Flying together. -2 Falling down.
tinā सातिना A black variety of skin (चर्मजाति); Kau. A.2.11. सातीनः sātīnḥ सातीनकः sātīnakḥ सातीलकः sātīlakḥ सातीनः सातीनकः सातीलकः Pease.
siddhāntin सिद्धान्तिन् m. 1 One who establishes a conclusion after noticing and answering objections (or पूर्वपक्ष). -2 One learned in scientific text-books. -3 A follower of the Mīmāṁsā philosophy.
sīmantinī सीमन्तिनी A woman; मा स्म सीमन्तिनी काचिज्जनयेत् पुत्र- मीदृशम् H.2.7; Me.12; Bk.5.22.
sutin सुतिन् a. (-नी f.) Having a child or children. -m. A father.
sutinī सुतिनी A mother; तेनाम्बा यदि सुतिनी वद वन्ध्या कीदृशी भवति Subhāṣ.
saikatinī सैकतिनी a. Full of sand; समाचिता सैकतिनी वनस्थली Ṛs.2.9.
hastin हस्तिन् a. (-नी f.) [हस्तः शुण्डादण्डो$स्त्यस्य इनि] 1 Having hands. -2 Having a trunk. -m. An elephant; Ms.7. 96;12.43; (elephants are said to be of four kinds; भद्र, मन्द्र, मृग and मिश्र). -Comp. -अध्यक्षः a superintendent of elephants. -अशना Boswellia Serrata (Mar. साळई, कुरुंद). -आजीवः an elephant-driver. -आयुर्वेदः a work dealing with the treatment of the elephant's diseases. -आरोहः an elephant-driver or rider. -कक्ष्यः 1 a lion. -2 a tiger. -कर्णः the castor-oil plant. -गिरिः the city and district of Kāñchī. -घ्नः 1 an elephantkiller. -2 a man. -चारः a kind of weapon. -चारिन् m. an elephant-driver. -जागरिकः a keeper of elephants. -जिह्वा a particular vein. -दन्तः 1 the tusk of an elephant. -2 a peg projecting from a wall. (-न्तम्) 1 ivory. -2 a radish. -दन्तकम् a radish. -नखम् a sort of turret protecting the approach to the gate of a city or fort. -नासा an elephant's trunk. -पः, -पकः an elephant driver or rider; जज्ञे जनैर्मुकुलिताक्षमनाददाने संरब्धहस्तिपक- निष्ठुरचोदनाभिः Śi.5.49; इति घोषयतीव हिण्डिमः करिणो हस्तिपका- हतः क्कणन् H.2.86. -पर्णी the कर्कटी plant. -प्रधान a. chiefly depending on elephants; Kau. A.2.2. -बन्धकी a female elephant helping in tethering wild ones; Kau. A.2.2. -मदः the ichor issuing from the temples of an elephant in rut. -मयूरकः N. of a plant (Mar. आज- मोदा). -मल्लः 1 N. of Airāvata; सुराधिपाधिष्ठितहस्तिमल्ललीलां दधौ राजतगण्डशैलः Śi.4.13. -2 of Gaṇeśa. -3 of Śaṅkha, the eighth of the chief Nāgas. -4 a heap of ashes. -5 a shower of dust. -6 frost. -यूथः, -थम् a herd of elephants. -वक्त्रः N. of Gaṇeśa; Dk.2.3. -वर्चसम् the splendour or magnificence of an elephant. -वाहः 1 an elephant-driver. -2 a hook for driving elephants. -विषाणी Musa Sapientum (Mar. केळ). -शाला an elephant-stable. -शुण्डा, -ण्डी A kind of shrub (Mar. इंद्रवारुणी, -कवंडळ). -श्यामाकः a kind of millet. -षड्गवम् a collection of six elephants. -स्नानम् = गजस्नानम् q. v.; अवशेन्द्रियचित्तानां हस्तिस्नानमिव क्रिया H.1.17. -हस्तः an elephant's trunk. हस्तिन hastina (ना nā) पुरम् puram हस्तिन (ना) पुरम् N. of a city founded by king Hastin, said to be situated some fifty miles north-east of the modern Delhi; it forms a central scene of action in the Mahābhārata; it's other names are:-- गजाह्वय, नागसाह्वय, नागाह्व, हास्तिन.
hastinī हस्तिनी 1 A female elephant. -2 A kind of drug and perfume. -3 A woman of a particular class, one of the four classes into which writers on erotical science divide women (described as having thick lips, thick hips, thick fingers, large breasts, dark complexion, and libidinous appetite); the Ratimañjarī thus describes her:-- स्थूलाधरा स्थूलनितम्बबिम्बा स्थूलाङ्गुलिः स्थूलकुचा सुशीला । कामोत्सुका गाढरतिप्रिया च नितान्तभोक्त्री (नितम्ब- खर्वा) खलु हस्तिनी स्यात् (करिणी मता सा) 8.
hastinam हस्तिनम् N. of Hastināpura, q. v. -a. Having the depth of an elephant (as water); सरस्तलं हास्तिनम् Dk.2.7.
Macdonell Vedic Search
43 results
ajamāyu ajá-māyu, a. (Bv.) bleating like a goat, vii. 103, 6. 10 [māyú, m. bleat].
adri á-dri, m. rock, i. 85, 5 [not splitting: dṛ pierce].
adhvaryu adhvar-yú, m. officiating priest, vii. 103, 8.
aniviśamāna á-niviśamāna, pr. pt. A. unresting, vii. 49, 1 [ni + viś go to rest].
anuvrata ánu-vrata, a. devoted, x. 34, 2 [acting according to the will (vratá) of another].
apraketa a-praketá, a. (Bv.) indistinguishable, x. 129, 3 [praketá perception].
amanyamāna á-manya-māna, pr. pt. Ā. not thinking = unexpecting, ii. 12, 10 [man think].
ayās a-yá̄s, a. nimble, i. 154, 6 [not exerting oneself: yās = yas heat oneself].
avasāna ava-sá̄na, n. resting place, x. 14, 9 [unbinding, giving rest: áva + sā = si tie].
āsīna á̄s-īna, irr. pr. pt. Ā., sitting, x. 15, 7 [ās sit].
usrayāman usrá-yāman, a. (Bv.) faring at daybreak, vii. 71, 4 [usrá matutinal, yá̄man, n. course].
kumāradeṣṇa kumārá-deṣṇa, a. (Bv.) presenting gifts like boys, x. 34, 7 [deṣṇá, n. gift from dā give].
gartasad garta-sád, a. (Tp.) sitting on a car-seat, ii. 33, 11.
giriṣṭhā giri-ṣṭhā, a. mountain-haunting, i. 154, 2 [sthā stand].
gharmasad gharma-sád, a. (Tp.) sitting at the heating vessel, x 15, 9. 10 [sad sit].
carṣaṇīdhrt carṣaṇī-dhṛ́-t, a. (Tp.) supporting the folk, iii. 59, 6 [carṣaṇí, a. active, f. folk + dhṛ-t supporting].
janayant janáy-ant, cs. pr. pt. generating, i. 85, 2.
jāgṛvi já̄gṛ-vi, a. watchful, v. 11, 1; stimulating, x. 34, 1 [from red. stem of 2. gṛ wake].
jñā jñā know, IX. jāná̄ti, x. 34, 4 [cp. Gk. ἔγνω-ν, Lat. co-gno-sco, Eng. know]. ví-, ps. jñāyáte be distinguished, iv. 51, 6.
trātṛ trá̄-tṛ, a. protecting, viii. 48, 14 [trā protect].
tripañcāśa tri-pañcāśá, a. consisting of three fifties, x. 34, 8.
tripād tri-pá̄d, a. (Bv.) consisting of three-fourths, x. 90, 4; m. three-fourths, x. 90, 3.
dadhāna dádh-āna, pr. pt. Ā. committing, assuming, i. 35, 4; ii. 12, 10; = going, x. 15, 10 [dhā put].
dvādaśa dvādaśá, a. consisting of twelve, m. twelve-month, vii. 103, 9.
dhārayatkavi dhārayát-kavi, a. (gov.) supporting the sage, i. 160, 1 [dhāráyat, pr. pt. cs. of dhṛ hold].
parāyant parā-yánt, pr. pt. departing, x. 34, 5 [párā away, Gk. πέρᾱ beyond, + i go].
pepiśat pépiś-at, pr. pt. int. thickly painting, x. 127, 7 [piś paint].
barhiṣad barhi-ṣád, a. (Tp.) sitting on the sacrificial grass, x. 15, 3. 4 [for barhiḥ-ṣád: sad sit].
madant mád-ant, pr. pt. rejoicing, iv. 50, 2; delighting in (inst.), iii. 59, 3.
yudhyamāna yúdhya-māna, pr. pt. Ā. fighting; m. fighter, ii. 12, 9 [yudh fight].
rakṣamāṇa rákṣa-māṇa, pr. pt. Ā. protecting, vii. 61, 3 [rakṣ protect].
varṇa vár-ṇa, m. colour, ii. 12, 4 [coating: vṛ cover].
vasudeya vasu-déya, n. granting of wealth, ii. 33, 7.
vāyavyȧ vᾱyav-yȧ, a. relating to the wind, aërial, x. 90, 8 [vāyú].
vyȧkta vy-ȧkta, pp. distinguished by (inst.), x. 14, 9; palpable, x. 127, 7 [ví + añj adorn].
śaśvant śáś-vant, a. ever repeating itself, many, ii. 12, 10; -vat, adv. for ever, i. 35, 5 [for sá + śvant, orig. pt. of śū swell, Gk. ἅ-παντ-].
saṃvidāna saṃ-vid-āná, pr. pt. Ā. uniting, with (inst.), viii. 48, 13; x. 14, 4 [vid find].
sajoṣas sa-jóṣas, a. acting in harmony with (inst.), viii. 48, 15 [jóṣas, n. pleasure].
sarvavīra sárva-vīra, a. consisting entirely of sons, iv. 50, 10; x. 15, 11.
sāśanānaśana sāśanānaśaná, n. (Dv.) eating and noneating things, x. 90, 4 [sa-aśana + anaśana].
siṣvidāna siṣvid-āná, pf. pt. Ā. sweating, vii. 103, 8 [svid perspire: Eng. sweat].
svābhu sv-ābhú, a. invigorating, iv. 50, 10.
havirad havir-ád, a. (Tp.) eating the oblation, x. 15, 10 [havís + ad].
Macdonell Search
Results for tin44 results
tintiḍa m. (?) Indian tamarind; î, f. id.; i-kâ, f. id.; î-ka, m. id.; n. the fruit.
aṃsavartin a. resting on the shoulder; -vivartin, a. bending towards the shoulder(s); -vyâpin, a. reaching to the --.
atiniṣkaruṇa a. extremely cruel.
atinirghṛṇa a. altogether pitiless; -daya, a. id.; -bandha, m. excessive urgency: -tas, in. very urgently; -vartin, a. behaving in a very unseemly way; -vasu tva, n. extreme poverty.
atinibhṛtam ad. with the utmost secrecy.
atināṣṭra a. escaped from danger.
atipātin a. surpassing in speed; missing, neglecting.
atinairantarya n. strict continuity.
atinṛśaṃsa a. too spiteful or cruel.
atinīcais ad. too obsequiously.
atiniṣṇāta pp. very experienced.
atiniṣṭhura a. too rough, too hard.
adhītin a. well-read in (lc.); study ing the scriptures.
anabhyāvartin a. not return ing.
anāvartin a. not returning.
apunarnivartin a. not re turning.
avattin a. dividing into (--, e. g. four) parts (--°ree;).
avinivartin a. not turning back, not fleeing.
āpātin a. occurring (--°ree;).
āmnātin a. hvg. made mention of (lc.).
ucchāstravartin a. trans gressing the institutes of the law.
upapātin a. befalling (--°ree;).
kṛtin a. active; clever; skilful, ex perienced (in, lc., --°ree;); having attained one's object, satisfied; -i-tva, n. satisfaction.
ghātin a. killing, murdering; de stroying; injurious; m. murderer; -ya, fp. to be killed or destroyed.
carmāvakartin m. leather cutter, shoemaker; -½avakartri, m. id.
cittin a. wise, intelligent.
dantin a. tusked; m. elephant; -ila, m. N.; -ura, a. having prominent teeth; uneven; thickly studded with, full of (--°ree;); ugly: -tâ, f. ugliness.
dyotin a. shining; signifying.
dvaitin m. dualist.
tinirvṛti f. not too great satisfaction; -nîka, a. not too low; -pari- kara, a. having a limited retinue; -pari sphuta, a. somewhat concealed; -paryâpta, pp. not too abundant; -pushta, pp.not too well furnished with (in.); -prakupita, pp. not excessively angry; -pramanas, a. not too good-humoured; -prasiddha, pp. not noto rious; -bhârika, a. not too weighty; -bhin na, pp. not very different from (ab.); -mâ tram, ad. not excessively; -mân-in, a. not esteeming oneself toohighly: (-i)-tâ, f. absence of vanity; -ramanîya, fp. not too charming: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -rûpa, a. not very pretty; -visadam, ad. (kiss) not very audibly; -vis târa-samkata, a. neither too wide nor too narrow; -sîta½ushna, a. neither too hot nor too cold; -slishta, pp. not very firm; -sva stha, a. not very well, poorly.
tin a. flying; alighting on (lc.); falling or sinking, in (--°ree;); --°ree;, arising, ap pearing (cloud); causing to or letting fall, felling, throwing down (--°ree;).
pautināsikya n. affliction of a foul-smelling nose.
pratinagaram ad. in every town; -nadi, ad. at every river; -nándana, n. greeting; grateful acceptance; -namas kâra, a. returning a reverential salutation; -nava, a. new, young, fresh, recent; -nâga, m. hostile elephant; -nâdî, f. branch-vein; -nâda, m. echo; -nâma, ad. by name: -grah anam, n. ad. mentioning each individual name; (práti)-nâman, a. related in name; -nâyaka, m. opposing hero (in a play); -nârî, f. female rival; -nidhâtavya, fp. to be substituted; -nidhâpayitavya, fp. to be caused to be substituted; -nidhi, m. substi tution; substitute; image, likeness; counter part of (--°ree;); -nidhî-kri, substitute anything (ac.) for (--°ree;); -nidheya, fp. to be substi tuted; -nipâta, m. falling down; -niyama, m. rule for each particular case; -nirdesa, m. reference back to, renewed mention of (g.): -ka, a. referring back to; -nirdesya, fp.referred to again; -niryâtana, n. restor ation, restitution; -nivartana, n. return; -nivârana, n. keeping off; -nivritti, f. re turn; -nisam, ad. every night; -niskaya, m. opposing opinion; -nishtha, a. standing on the oppositeside; -nripati, m. rival king; -noda, m. repulse; -nyâyám, ad. in reverse order; -nyâsa, m. counter deposit.
prāṇighātin a. killing living beings; -dyûta, n. game with fighting ani mals (such as ram-fighting etc.).
bhāvicakravartin m. future king, crown prince.
yatin m. ascetic.
vartin a. abiding, staying, resting, being, situated, in (gnly. --°ree;); being in a con dition etc. (--°ree;); practising (--°ree;); engaged in, making (a request, --°ree;); behaving, acting (--°ree; or w. ad.); behaving properly towards (--°ree;); m. meaning of a suffix.
vedāntin m. follower of the Ve dânta system.
vratin a. engaged in a religious observance, practising a vow; --°ree;, practising; worshipping; behaving like.
sutin a. having a son or sons: -î, f. mother of a son.
sīmantin a. parted, having a parting (hair, pregnant woman): -î, f. woman.
hastināpura n. N. of a city the ruins of which are situated on the banks of an old bed of the Ganges, 57 miles N. E. of Delhi.
hastin V. a. having hands, deft handed; w. mriga, m. animal with the hand (=trunk), oldest term for elephant (RV., AV.); m. (V., C.) elephant; N. (C.): (ín)-î, f. female elephant (V., C.); a certain class of women in erotics (C.).
hāstina a. belonging to the ele phant (AV.); having the depth of an ele phant (water; C.): -pura, n. = Hastinâ pura.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
Results for tin44 results0 results232 results
gotamena tinīkṛtaḥ SMB.2.7.1c.
aṃśuṃ duhanti hastino bharitraiḥ # RV.3.36.7c.
akṣitiṃ bhūyasīm # AVś.18.4.27. Apparently a pratīka: the Anukramaṇī designates the passage as yājuṣī gāyatrī, i.e. a mantra consisting of six syllables.
agnayaḥ sagarāḥ sagarā stha sagareṇa nāmnā raudreṇānīkena pāta māgnayaḥ pipṛta māgnayo gopāyata mā namo vo 'stu mā mā hiṃsiṣṭa # VS.5.34; (omitting gopāyata mā) VSK.5.8.5; (omitting māgnayo gopāyata and writing astu for 'stu) śś.6.13.1. P: agnayaḥ sagarāḥ Kś.9.8.24. See prec. two.
agnaye sviṣṭakṛte suhutahute sarvaprāyaścittāhutīnāṃ (HG. suhutahute sarvahuta āhutīnāṃ; ApMB. suhutahuta āhutīnāṃ) kāmānāṃ samardhayitre sarvān naḥ kāmān samardhaya (the last four words omitted in ApMBḥG.) svāhā # AG.1.10.23; HG.1.3.7; ApMB.2.18.31 (ApG.7.20.4).
agnim adya hotāram (commentary continues avṛṇītām imau yajamānau pacantau paktīḥ pacantau purolāśaṃ badhnantāv agnīṣomābhyāṃ chāgam [dviyajamānake]; and avṛṇateme yajamānāḥ pacantaḥ paktīḥ pacantaḥ purolāśaṃ badhnanto 'gnīṣomābhyāṃ chāgam [bahuyajamānake]. The version of the formula [comm. sūktavākapraiṣa: cf. Aś.3.6.16] in the singular does not seem to be mentioned) # śś.5.20.5. Cf. the prec. six.
agniṃ brūmo vanaspatīn # AVś.11.6.1a; AVP.15.13.1a; Kauś.9.2,4.
agnir gārhapatyānām # MS.2.6.6: 67.11; KS.15.5. See agnir gṛhapatīnām.
agnir gṛhapatīnām # VS.9.39; TS.1.8.10.1; śB.5.3.3.11. See agnir gārhapatyānām.
agnir netā bhaga iva kṣitīnām # RV.3.20.4a; KB.15.2. P: agnir netā AB.3.18.7; 4.29.10; 31.8; 5.1.15; 4.12; 6.9; 12.7; 16.12; 18.10; 20.10; ā.1.2.1.7; Aś.5.14.17; śś.7.19.12.
agnir manyuṃ pratinudan purastāt # TS.4.7.14.2a; KS.40.10a. See agne manyuṃ.
agnir vanaspatīnām adhipatiḥ (AVP. adhyakṣaḥ) sa māvatu (AVP. has sa māvatu at the beginning of the following formula) # AVś.5.24.2; AVP.15.7.8. P: agnir vanaspatīnām Vait.8.13.
agnir hetīnāṃ pratidhartā # VS.15.10; TS.4.4.2.1; MS.2.8.9: 113.5; KS.17.8; śB.8.6.1.5.
agne gṛhapate sugṛhapatir ahaṃ tvayā (VS.śB. sugṛhapatis tvayāgne 'haṃ; śś.Kauś. sugṛhapatir ahaṃ tvayāgne) gṛhapatinā (VSK. gṛhapatyā) bhūyāsam # VS.2.27; VSK.2.6.6; TS.1.5.6.4; 6.6.3; MS.1.4.2: 48.19; 1.4.7: 55.8; 1.5.14 (ter): 83.1,12; 84.6; KS.5.5; 7.3; śB.1.9.3.19; śś.4.12.10; Apś.6.26.1; Kauś.70.9. P: agne gṛhapate TS.1.5.8.5; 7.6.4; KS.7.11; 32.5; Vait.4.19; Kś.3.8.21; Apś.4.16.2; 6.19.2; Mś.1.4.3.14; 1.6.1.52.
agne 'bhyāvartinn abhi mā ni vartasva (TS. abhi na ā vartasva; KS. abhi no nivartasva; MS. abhi māvartasva; AVP.Kauś. abhi na ā vavṛtsva) # AVP.1.41.1a; VS.12.7a; TS.4.2.1.2a; MS.1.7.1a: 109.12; KS.16.8a; śB.6.7.3.6; Kauś.72.14a. P: agne 'bhyāvartin MS.2.7.8: 85.10; KS.19.11; 22.12; Mś.6.1.4.12; Apś.16.10.13; 12.2; Kś.16.5.15; Kauś.72.13; HG.1.26.11; BDh.3.7.12. Cf. abhī na ā.
agne manyuṃ pratinudan pareṣām # RV.10.128.6a; AVś.5.3.2a; AVP.5.4.2a. See agnir manyuṃ.
agne vratapā asme vratapās tve vratapāḥ punar vratapā vratināṃ vratāni # KS.2.8; 3.1. P: agne vratapāḥ KS.26.2. Cf. agne vratapate tvaṃ, and next.
achā sudyumnāṃ rātinīṃ ghṛtācīm # RV.3.19.2b.
atilohitānāṃ rudrāṇāṃ (also atilohitīnāṃ rudrāṇīnāṃ) sthāne svatejasā bhāni # TA.1.17.1,2.
atho payasvatīnām (AVP. -vatāṃ payaḥ) # AVś.3.24.1c; AVP.5.30.1c. See under apāṃ payaso.
atho vanaspatīnām # AVś.4.4.5b; AVP.4.5.5b.
atho vikaṅkatīmukhāḥ # AVś.11.10.3b. Cf. atho kaṅkatadantyā and atho satīnakaṅkataḥ.
atho satīnakaṅkataḥ # RV.1.191.1b. Cf. atho vikaṅkatīmukhāḥ.
adhipatir asi prāṇāya tvā prāṇaṃ jinva # TS.3.5.2.4; 4.4.1.2; KS.17.7; 37.17; PB.1.10.5; Vait.26.1. P: adhipatir asi TS.5.3.6.2; GB.2.2.14. Cf. under adhipatinā prāṇāya etc.
anayā tvā diśā prajāpatinā devatayānāptena chandasā śiśiram ṛtuṃ praviśāmi # KA.1.63; 2.63.
antarikṣāya vaṃśanartinam # VS.30.21; TB.3.4.1.17.
anyam-anyam atinenīyamānaḥ # RV.6.47.16b.
apa āsyena # VS.25.1; TS.5.7.12.1; MS.3.15.1: 177.8; 3.15.9: 180.4; KSA.13.2. Cf. apo vastinā.
apa oṣadhīr vanaspatīn (omitted in KS.) janam agan yajñaḥ # MS.1.4.4: 51.15; KS.25.7.
apa dvārā matīnām # RV.9.10.6a; SV.2.474a.
apātām aśvinā sarasvatīndraḥ sutrāmā vṛtrahā somān surāmṇaḥ # TB.2.6.15.2.
apād eti prathamā padvatīnām # RV.1.152.3a; AVś.9.10.23a.
apām arthaṃ yatīnām # RV.1.158.6c.
apāṃ payaso yat payaḥ # AVś.18.3.56c; TS.1.5.10.3c; TB.3.7.4.7c; Mś.1.4.1.5c. See next, and atho payasvatīnām.
apur aśvinā sarasvatīndraḥ sutrāmā surāsomān # VS.21.60.
apo vastinā # VS.25.7. Cf. apa āsyena.
aprāṇaiti prāṇena prāṇatīnām # AVś.8.9.9a.
abhikrandan stanayann aruṇaḥ śitiṅgaḥ # AVś.11.5.12a. Cf. under abhi kranda sta-.
abhī na ā vavṛtsva # RV.4.31.4a. Cf. agne 'bhyāvartinn.
abhūd u vipro havyo matīnām # RV.3.5.3d.
abhūr āpīṇām (and āpīnām) # see abhūr gṛṣṭīnām.
abhūr gṛṣṭīnām (AVś.19.24.6b, vaśānām; HG. āpīṇām; ApMB. āpīnām; AVP. vāpīnām, read v āpīnām ?) abhiśastipā u (HG.ApMB. -pāvā) # AVś.2.13.3b; 19.24.6b; AVP.15.6.3b; HG.1.4.3b; ApMB.2.2.8b. Note the mss. readings at AVś.19.24.6. Cf. bhavā kṛṣṭīnām.
ambikāpataya umāpataye paśupataye (wanting in MahānU.) namo namaḥ # TA.10.17.1; MahānU.13.4.
aryamaṇaṃ bhagam adabdhadhītīn # RV.6.51.3c.
avapatantānāṃ rudrāṇāṃ (also avapatantīnāṃ rudrāṇīnāṃ) sthāne svatejasā bhāni # TA.1.17.2.
avayātā sadam id durmatīnām # RV.1.129.11b.
aṣṭrāṃ tāḍaṃ pratīnāhā (Apś. tālaṃ pratīnāham) # MS.2.7.12c: 92.10; Apś.16.18.4c.
asmākaṃ tvā matīnām # RV.4.32.15a.
ā jāgṛvir vipra ṛtā (SV.JB. ṛtaṃ; PB. kṛtaṃ, misprint for ṛtaṃ ?) matīnām # RV.9.97.37a; SV.2.707a; JB.3.291; PB.15.9.3.
ādāro vāṃ matīnām # RV.1.46.5a.
ā no nāvā matīnām # RV.1.46.7a.
ā no vīrebhir janitā matīnām # MS.4.14.9a: 228.7.
ā paśuṃ gāsi pṛthivīṃ vanaspatīn # RV.8.27.2a.
ā yaṃ viśantīndavaḥ # AVś.6.2.2a. P: ā yaṃ viśanti Kauś.29.27.
āyataḥ pratinandanam (AVP. -nandanīm) # AVś.7.38.1d; AVP.3.29.2c.
āyatīnāṃ prathamā śaśvatīnām # RV.1.113.8b.
āyurdāḥ # Mś.4.3.37. The Paddhati continues: payodāḥ, tejodāḥ, yaśodāḥ, varcodāḥ, varco me datta.
āyur yajñapataye dhattam (MS. yajñapatau, omitting dhattam) # MS.1.3.12: 34.15; TB.1.1.1.3; Apś.12.22.9.
āsurasya ca hastinaḥ # AVś.3.22.4d; AVP.3.18.5b.
idaṃ vatsyāmo bhoḥ (HG. vatsyāvaḥ, omitting bhoḥ) # AG.3.10.2; HG.1.5.13. See om ahaṃ.
idam ahaṃ tān valagān (continuing variously) # see idam ahaṃ taṃ valagam etc., and next three.
idam aham ānuṣṭubhena chandasaikaviṃśena stomena vairājena sāmnā prajāpatinā devatayāyus te dīrghāyutvam ādade 'sau # KS.36.15.
inaḥ puṣṭīnāṃ sakhā # RV.10.26.7b.
indraḥ pañca kṣitīnām # RV.1.7.9c; AVś.20.70.15c.
indra kṣitīnām asi mānuṣīṇām # RV.3.34.2c; AVś.20.11.2c.
indre kāmā ayaṃsata (Durga in Roth's edition, Erl"auterungen, p. 100, continues, divyāsaḥ pārthivā uta, tyam ū ṣu gṛṇatā naraḥ) # N.7.2a.
indreṇa varuṇena candreṇa sūryeṇa ca # AVP.1.4.2a. Probably not a verse, but a gloss listing four ūhas to be applied to the word parjanyaṃ in pāda b of the preceding stanza (see Zehnder's edition of kāṇḍa 2, p. 253).
indro hetīnāṃ pratidhartā # VS.15.11; TS.4.4.2.1; MS.2.8.9: 113.10; KS.17.8; śB.8.6.1.6.
ime jīvā vi mṛtair āvavṛtran (TA. āvavarttin !) # RV.10.18.3a; AVś.12.2.22a; TA.6.10.2a; AG.4.4.9. P: ime jīvāḥ Kauś.71.18; 86.21. Cf. BṛhD.7.11 (B).
iṣṭaṃ pūrtaṃ śaśvatīnāṃ samānām # TB.2.5.5.2c.
īyuṣīṇām upamā śaśvatīnām # RV.1.113.15c; 124.2c.
īśe kṛṣṭīnāṃ nṛtuḥ # RV.8.68.7d.
ugrāyudhāḥ pramatinaḥ pravīrāḥ # RVKh.7.55.11a.
uta trāyasva gṛṇata uta stīn # RV.10.148.4d.
uto vihutmatīnām # RV.1.134.6d.
uttamāyā diśaḥ prajāpatinā rājñādhyakṣeṇa # AVP.4.30.7b.
uttānāḥ pādaghātinīḥ # AVP.7.13.6b.
upa no vājān mimīhy upa stīn # RV.7.19.11c; AVś.20.37.11c.
upa preta marutaḥ sudānava (KS. svatavasa) enā viśpatinābhy amuṃ rājānam # TS.2.3.1.2; KS.11.6. P: upa preta marutaḥ sudānavaḥ Apś.19.20.10. See preta marutaḥ.
upāyana uṣasāṃ gomatīnām # RV.2.28.2c.
uṣaspatir vācaspatinā saṃvidānaḥ # AVś.16.6.6a.
usrāv etaṃ dhūrṣāhau (Mś. dhūrvāhau; VSK. usrā etaṃ dhūrvāhau) yujyethām (TS. dhūrṣāhāv, omitting yujyethām) anaśrū avīrahaṇau brahmacodanau # VS.4.33; VSK.4.10.4; TS.1.2.8.2; śB.3.3.4.12; Mś.2.1.4.27. Ps: usrāv etaṃ dhūrṣāhau TS.6.1.11.4; Apś.10.28.1; usrāv etam Kś.7.9.11. See usrā etaṃ dhūrbādhā.
ūrjasvāṃś ca payasvāṃś ca # AVś.19.46.6d. AVP.4.23.6 divides differently, putting ūrjasvāṃś ca at the end of pāda c, and payasvāṃś ca at the beginning of pāda d. See śaṃbhūś ca, and payasvāṃś cāstṛtas.
ūrdhvayā tvā diśā bṛhaspatinā devatayā pāṅktena chandasāgneḥ pṛṣṭham upadadhāmi # KS.22.5. See next two.
ūrdhvayā tvā diśā bṛhaspatinā devatayā pāṅktena chandasā hemantam ṛtuṃ praviśāmi # KA.1.62; 2.62. See prec.
ūrdhvā yat te tretinī bhūt # RV.10.105.9a.
ūrdhvāyā diśo bṛhaspatinā rājñādhyakṣeṇa # AVP.4.30.6b.
ṛtūn brūma ṛtupatīn # AVś.11.6.17a; AVP.15.14.2a. See next.
ṛtūn yaja ṛtupatīn # AVś.3.10.9a. See prec.
ṛdhyāsam adya pṛṣatīnāṃ graham # TS.3.2.6.1.
ekaḥ kṛṣṭīnām abhavat sahāvā # RV.6.18.2d; KS.8.17d.
ete dhāvantīndavaḥ # RV.9.21.1a.
evā te vayam indra bhuñjatīnām # RV.10.89.17a.
oṣadhīḥ prīṇāmi # śś.2.9.12. Cf. oṣadhivanaspatīn.
oṣadhīś ca vanaspatīn # PG.3.4.8b.
ko vanaspatīnām adadhād oṣadhīnām # AVP.13.7.10b.
klībarūpāṃs tirīṭinaḥ # AVś.8.6.7d.
kṣumantaṃ vājaṃ śatinaṃ sahasriṇam # RV.8.88.2c; AVś.20.9.2c; 49.5c; SV.2.36c.
kṣetrasya patinā vayam # RV.4.57.1a; TS.1.1.14.2a; MS.4.11.1a: 160.3; KS.4.15a; Aś.9.11.14; AG.2.10.4; ApMB.2.18.47a (ApG.7.20.16); N.10.15a. P: kṣetrasya patinā śś.15.8.15; śG.4.13.5; Rvidh.2.14.4. Cf. BṛhD.5.7.
garbho vanaspatīnām # AVś.5.25.7b; AVP.12.3.6b; VS.12.37b; TS.4.2.3.3b; MS.2.7.10b: 88.8; KS.16.10b; śB.6.8.2.4b; 12.4.4.4b.
gātrāṇi parvaśas te (KSA. parvaśaḥ, omitting te) # VS.23.42c; TS.5.2.12.1c; KSA.10.6c.
guhāhitāṃ nihitāṃ (KS. hitāṃ, omitting ni-) gahvareṣu # KS.31.14b; Mś.1.2.4.4b. See guhā satīṃ.
godhā kālakā dārvāghāṭas te vanaspatīnām # VS.24.35; TS.5.5.15.1; MS.3.14.16: 175.12; KSA.7.5.
gopāyata (AVś.AVP. -taṃ) mā # AVś.5.9.8; AVP.6.12.1; VS.5.34 (wanting in VSK.5.8.5); Vait.18.8; Apś.6.21.1. Cf. under taṃ gopāya.
canodhā asi (VSK. canodhāś, omitting asi) cano mayi dhehi # VS.8.7; VSK.8.4.1; śB.4.4.1.6.
ciketa suṣṭutīnām # RV.10.26.2d.
cetantī sumatīnām # RV.1.3.11b; VS.20.85b; TS.4.1.11.2b.
janitā matīnām # AVś.13.3.19; MS.4.9.6: 126.5. See pitā matīnām.
jīvo jīvantyā adhi (ApMB. jīvantyāḥ, omitting adhi) # RV.5.78.9d; ApMB.2.11.17d,18d.
juṣethāṃ viśvā havanā matīnām # RV.6.69.4c.
juhotana vṛṣabhāya kṣitīnām # RV.7.98.1b; AVś.20.87.1b.
jyāyasvantaś cittino mā vi yauṣṭa # AVś.3.30.5a; AVP.5.19.5a.
jyotir bhā asi vanaspatīnām (MS. -nām apām) oṣadhīnāṃ rasaḥ # MS.4.9.10: 130.6; TA.4.12.1; Apś.15.14.10. See next.
taṃ va indraṃ catinam asya śākaiḥ # RV.6.19.4a.
taṃ vā ahaṃ nārvāñcaṃ na parāñcaṃ na pratyañcaṃ satyenodareṇa tenainaṃ prāśiṣaṃ tayainam ajīgamam # AVś.11.3.42; ... pratyañcaṃ satye pratiṣṭhāya tayainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.49; ... pratyañcaṃ saptaṛṣibhiḥ prāṇāpānais tair enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.38; ... pratyañcaṃ samudreṇa vastinā tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.43; ... pratyañcaṃ savituḥ prapadābhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.47; ... pratyañcaṃ sūryācandramasābhyām akṣībhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.34; ... pratyañcaṃ tvaṣṭur aṣṭhīvadbhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.45; ... pratyañcaṃ divā pṛṣṭhena tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.40; ... pratyañcaṃ dyāvāpṛthivībhyāṃ śrotrābhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.33; ... pratyañcam agner jihvayā tayainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.36; ... pratyañcam antarikṣeṇa vyacasā tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.39; ... pratyañcam aśvinoḥ pādābhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.46; ... pratyañcam ṛtasya hastābhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.48; ... pratyañcam ṛtubhir dantais tair enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.37; ... pratyañcaṃ pṛthivyorasā tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.41; ... pratyañcaṃ bṛhaspatinā śīrṣṇā tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.32; ... pratyañcaṃ brahmaṇā mukhena tenainaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.35; ... pratyañcaṃ mitrāvaruṇayor ūrubhyāṃ tābhyām enaṃ etc. AVś.11.3.44.
taṃ tvā hastino madhumantam adribhiḥ # RV.9.80.5a.
tava praṇītīndra johuvānān # RV.7.28.3a.
tān aśvinā sarasvatī (MS. sarasvatīndraḥ) # VS.21.42i; MS.3.11.4i: 145.17; TB.2.6.11.10i.
tāsāṃ śvanvatīnām # AVP.7.13.1c--14c. Cf. śataṃ śvan-, and śataṃ ca śvan-.
tiraḥ pavitram atinītaḥ # TB.3.7.4.14c; Apś.1.14.3c.
tisṝṇāṃ saptatīnām # RV.8.19.37c.
tīkṣṇena kṣurabhṛṣṭinā # AVś.12.5.66b.
tebhir gacha vanaspatīn # Apś.5.27.1c.
te varāḥ pratinanditāḥ # ApG.1.2.16b.
tmanā śatinaṃ pururūpam iṣaṇi # RV.2.2.9d.
traya iva hastinaḥ saha # AVP.8.11.11d.
triḥ sapta saptatīnām # RV.8.46.26b.
trīl lokāns trīṃ lokapatīn # AVP.9.20.3.
tvaṃ vṛtrāṇi haṃsy apratīny eka it # RV.8.90.5c; SV.1.248c; 2.761c.
tvaṃ hi śaśvatīnām # RV.8.95.3c; 98.6a; AVś.20.64.3a; SV.2.599a; JB.3.233a.
darīman durmatīnām # RV.1.129.8c.
dātā me pṛṣatīnām # RV.8.65.10a. Cf. BṛhD.6.86.
dādhāremān vanaspatīn # RV.10.60.9b; AVś.6.17.2b.
no agne bṛhato (TSṃS. śatino) dāḥ sahasriṇaḥ # RV.2.2.7a; TS.2.2.12.6a; MS.4.12.2a: 180.7. Ps: dā no agne bṛhataḥ śś.3.2.4; dā no agne MS.4.14.16: 242.8; Mś.5.1.10.59.
divyaṃ chadmāsi saṃtatināma viśvajanasya chāyā # Lś.1.7.15. Cf. divaś chadmāsi.
dṛḍhā cid yā vanaspatīn # RV.5.84.3a; KS.10.12a; Aś.6.14.18; 9.5.2.
devaṃ barhir vāritīnām # VS.21.57a; 28.21a,44a; MS.3.11.5a: 148.1; 4.13.8 (bis): 210.18; 211.2; KS.19.13a; TB.2.6.10.6a; 14.5a; 20.5a; 3.6.13.1; 14.2; Aś.3.6.13; śś.5.20.4.
devasenānām abhibhañjatīnām # RV.10.103.8c; AVś.19.13.9c; AVP.7.4.9c; SV.2.1206c; VS.17.40c; TS.4.6.4.3c; MS.2.10.4c: 136.7; KS.18.5c.
devasyāhaṃ savituḥ prasave bṛhaspatinā vājajitā varṣiṣṭhaṃ nākaṃ ruheyam # TS.1.7.8.1; TB.1.3.6.1; Apś.18.4.12. See under devasya savituḥ savaṃ svargaṃ.
devasyāhaṃ savituḥ prasave bṛhaspatinā vājajitā vājaṃ jeṣam # TS.1.7.8.1; TB.1.3.6.1; Apś.18.4.8.
devaḥ san durmatīnām # RV.1.129.11c.
devā gātuvido (Mś. gātuvido gātuṃ vittvā) gātuṃ yajñāya vindata manasas patinā devena vātād yajñaḥ prayujyatām # TB.3.7.4.1; Apś.1.1.4; Mś.1.1.1.12 (perhaps gātuṃ vittvā is to be omitted). P: devā gātuvidaḥ Apś.3.13.2; Mś.1.3.5.21; 1.7.2.20; 1.7.4.33. Cf. next, and gātuṃ vittvā.
devānāṃ nihitaṃ nidhiṃ yam indraḥ (AVP. indra, but putting yam indra with the following pāda) # AVś.19.27.9a; AVP.10.7.9a.
devānāṃ pūr asi tāṃ tvā praviśāmi tāṃ tvā pra padye saha gṛhaiḥ saha prajayā saha paśubhiḥ sahartvigbhiḥ saha sadasyaiḥ saha somyaiḥ saha dakṣiṇīyaiḥ saha yajñena saha yajñapatinā # KS.35.10.
drapsaḥ purāṃ bhettā śaśvatīnām # SV.1.275c. See drapso bhettā.
drapso bhettā purāṃ śaśvatīnām # RV.8.17.14c. See drapsaḥ purāṃ.
dvau ca hastino dṛtī # AVś.20.131.23.
dhanaṃ saniṣyantīnām # RV.10.97.8c; AVP.11.6.8c; VS.12.82c; TS.4.2.6.3c; MS.2.7.13c: 94.2; KS.16.13c.
dhartā kṛṣṭīnām uta madhya iddhaḥ # RV.5.1.6d; TS.1.3.14.2d; MS.4.11.1d: 162.5; KS.2.15d.
nadaṃ yoyuvatīnām # RV.8.69.2b; SV.2.862b; ā.1.3.5.3; 5.1.6.5.
nadaṃ va odatīnām # RV.8.69.2a; SV.2.862a; JB.2.225; ā.1.3.5.2; 8.2; 5.1.6.4,5; śś.18.1.13; Lś.7.3.8. Designated as nada śś.18.1.12,14,15,21.
na pra minanti vratino vratāni # AVP.15.21.4a.
namaḥ kapardine ca pulastaye (VSK. pulastine) ca # VS.16.43; VSK.17.7.2; TS.4.5.9.1. See namaḥ pulastine, and namaḥ śikhaṇḍine.
namaḥ pitṛbhyaḥ pratinamaskārebhyo vo 'pi namaḥ # śś.6.2.2.
namaḥ pulastine ca kapardine ca # KS.17.15. See under namaḥ kapardine ca pu-.
namaḥ śikhaṇḍine ca pulastine ca # MS.2.9.8: 126.7. See under namaḥ kapardine ca pu-.
na mṛtyur āsīd amṛtaṃ na tarhi (TB. omitting āsīd, and, dividing wrongly, na mṛtyur amṛtaṃ tarhi na) # RV.10.129.2a; TB.2.8.9.4a; N.7.3. Cf. BṛhD.1.58.
namo harikeśāyopavītine # VS.16.17; TS.4.5.2.1; MS.2.9.3: 122.10; KS.17.12.
navānāṃ navatīnām # RV.1.191.13a; AVP.3.9.7a; 4.17.7a; 4.19.8a.
navo-navo bhavati (AVś.JUB. bhavasi) jāyamānaḥ # RV.10.85.19a; AVś.7.81.2a; 14.1.24a; TS.2.3.5.3; 4.14.1a; MS.4.12.2a: 181.5; KS.10.12a; TB.3.1.3.1; Aś.9.8.3; HG.1.16.1; BDh.3.8.10; JUB.3.27.11 (Vedic allusion which continues in quasi metrical style); N.11.6a. Ps: navo-navo bhavati VHDh.5.487; navo-navaḥ śś.14.32.4; GDh.27.5. Cf. BDh.3.8.14.
nidhedhāsi (KS. nidheyāsi) pracyutīnām apracyutaṃ nikāmadharaṇaṃ puruṣaspārhaṃ (KS. puruspārhaṃ) yaśasvat # MS.4.13.8: 211.1; KS.19.13; TB.3.6.13.1.
ni mitrayur aratīn atārīt # MS.2.6.12b: 71.8; KS.15.8b. See vi mitra.
nyagrodhena vanaspatīn # TS.7.3.14.1; KSA.3.4.
pañca kṣitīnāṃ vasu # RV.1.176.3b.
patiṃ kṛṣṭīnāṃ rathyaṃ rayīṇām # RV.7.5.5c.
patiḥ sindhūnām asi revatīnām # RV.10.180.1d; TS.3.4.11.4d; MS.4.12.3d: 184.16; KS.38.7d; TB.2.6.9.1d; 3.5.7.4d.
pari ṇetā matīnām # RV.9.103.4a.
parivarga indro durmatīnām # RV.1.129.8b.
pāṅktena chandasā bṛhaspatinā devatayāgneḥ pṛṣṭhenāgneḥ pṛṣṭham upa dadhāmi # TS.5.5.8.3. Cf. prec.
pāvako yad vanaspatīn # RV.5.7.4c; KS.35.14c; Apś.14.29.3c.
pitā devānāṃ janitā matīnām # AVś.13.3.19b.
pitā matīnām # VS.37.14; śB.14.1.4.3; TA.4.7.4; 5.6.8; KA.2.112. See janitā matīnām.
pitā matīnām asamaṣṭakāvyaḥ # RV.9.76.4d.
pitṝṇāṃ kaviḥ pramatir matīnām # AVś.18.3.63b.
pitṝn pañcajanān diśa āpa oṣadhīr vanaspatīñ janam agan yajñaḥ # Apś.9.10.16. See under pitṝn janam.
puṃsaḥ kṛṣṭīnām anumādyasya # RV.7.6.1b; SV.1.78b.
punar nau vratapate vratinor vratāni # MS.1.2.13: 22.17. P: punar nau vratapate Mś.2.2.4.43.
puruvīrābhir vṛṣabha kṣitīnām # RV.6.32.4c.
puro jaghanthāpratīni dasyoḥ # RV.6.31.4b.
pūr asi taṃ tvā prapadye saha grahaiḥ saha pragrahaiḥ saha prajayā saha paśubhiḥ sahartvigbhyaḥ saha somyaiḥ saha sadasyaiḥ saha dākṣiṇeyaiḥ saha yajñena saha yajñapatinā # Apś.14.26.1.
prajāpataye puruṣān hastina (MS. hastinā) ālabhate # VS.24.29; MS.3.14.8: 174.1.
prabhaṅgaṃ durmatīnām # RV.8.46.19a.
pra vā etīndur indrasya niṣkṛtim # AVś.18.4.60a. See pro ayāsīd.
pra viṣṭīminam āviṣuḥ # AVś.20.136.4b; VS.23.29b; śś.12.24.2.1b. See pra saṃhṛṣṭinam.
pra saṃhṛṣṭinam ājiṣuḥ # Lś.9.10.6b. See pra viṣṭīminam.
prādhvarāṇām (continuing pate vaso: pratīka of a khila) # BṛhD.8.94.
prāviśas tvaṃ vanaspatīn # TB.3.7.4.8b; Apś.1.6.1b.
priyosriyasya vṛṣabhasya retinaḥ # RV.10.40.11c.
pretyā dharmaṇe dharmaṃ jinva # MS.2.8.8: 112.5. See under pretinā.
pro ayāsīd indur indrasya niṣkṛtam # RV.9.86.16a; SV.1.557a; 2.502a; JB.3.188; PB.14.3.4. See pra vā etīndur.
bādhante viśvam abhimātinam apa # RV.1.85.3c.
bṛhat sāma pratiṣṭhityā antarikṣe (KS. -kṣam; TS. pratiṣṭhityai, omitting antari-) # VS.15.11; TS.4.4.2.1; MS.2.8.9: 113.12; śB.8.6.1.6.
bṛhaspatināvasṛṣṭām # AVś.14.2.53a--58a. P: bṛhaspatinā Kauś.76.31.
bṛhaspatir hetīnāṃ pratidhartā # VS.15.14; TS.4.4.2.3; MS.2.8.9: 114.7; KS.17.8; śB.8.6.1.9.
brahmaṇā tvā mahyaṃ pratigṛhṇāmy asau # HG.1.13.19d. See prajāpatinā tvā etc.
brahma samid bhavaty āhutīnām # TS.5.7.8.2d,3; TB.2.8.8.11d.
bhago na kāre havyo matīnām # RV.3.49.3c.
bhavā kṛṣṭīnām (AVś.AVP. gṛ-) abhiśastipāvā (AVś. -śastipā u; AVP. -śastivā u) # AVś.19.24.5b; AVP.15.6.2b; PG.1.4.12b; ApMB.2.2.7b; HG.1.4.2b. Cf. abhūr gṛṣṭīnām.
bhuvaḥ prajāpatināty ṛṣabheṇa skandayāmi # HG.1.25.2.
bhūḥ prajāpatināty ṛṣabheṇa skandayāmi # HG.1.25.2.
bhūyiṣṭhāṃ te nama"uktiṃ vidhema (with, or without svāhā) # RV.1.189.1d; VS.5.36d; 7.43d; 40.16d; VSK.9.2.3d (omitting svāhā, whereas VS.7.43d has it); TS.1.1.14.3d; 4.43.1d; MS.1.2.13d: 22.7; KS.3.1d; 6.10d; śB.3.6.3.11d; 4.3.4.12d; TB.2.8.2.3d; TA.1.8.8d.
bhūrīṇy eko apratīni hanti # RV.4.19.19b.
maṃhiṣṭham achoktibhir matīnām # RV.1.61.3c; AVś.20.35.3c.
mayā gāvo gopatinā (AVP. gopatyā) sacadhvam # AVś.3.14.6a; AVP.2.13.3a. Cf. mayi gāvaḥ, and mayi tiṣṭhantu.
mātaraṃ pratinandati # AVP.1.100.4b.
māntarikṣaṃ mā vanaspatīn # VS.11.45d; TS.4.1.4.3d; 5.1.5.6; MS.2.7.4d: 79.4; KS.16.4d; 19.5; śB.6.4.4.4.
māham ṛṣīn mantrakṛto mantrapatīn parādām # TA.4.1.1.
mṛgā iva hastinaḥ khādathā vanā # RV.1.64.7c.
ya āviveśoṣadhīr (AVPṃS. -śauṣadhīr) yo vanaspatīn # AVś.3.21.1c; AVP.3.12.1c; MS.2.13.13c: 162.11.
yakṣad agnir devo devāṃ (MS. devaṃ) ā ca vakṣat # VS.17.62; TS.4.6.3.4; 5.4.6.6; MS.2.10.5 (bis): 137.16,17; 3.3.8 (bis): 41.8,9; KS.18.3; AB.2.34.11 (omitting ā ca vakṣat); śB.9.2.3.20.
yajñaḥ praty u ṣṭhāt sumatau matīnām # Mś.1.7.3.42a. See yajña pratitiṣṭha, and cf. prec.
yatā sujūrṇī rātinī ghṛtācī # RV.4.6.3a.
yathāyathaṃ nau (KS. no) vratapate (KS. -pā) vratāni (TSṃS. vratinor vratāni; KS. vratināṃ vratāni) # VS.5.40; TS.1.3.4.3; MS.1.2.13: 22.18; KS.3.1; śB.3.6.3.21.
yathā vāto vanaspatīn # AVś.10.3.13a.
yathā hastī hastinyāḥ # AVś.6.70.2a.
yad vā pañca kṣitīnāṃ dyumnam ā bhara # RV.6.46.7c; SV.1.262c.
yad vā pañca kṣitīnām # RV.5.35.2c; KB.23.2.
yamo vaivasvato rājā (Aś.śś. vaivasvataḥ, omitting rājā) tasya pitaro viśas ta ima āsate yajūṃṣi (Aś.śś. yajurvedo) vedaḥ so 'yam # śB.13.4.3.6; Aś.10.7.2; śś.16.2.4--6.
yaḥ śipravān vṛṣabho yo matīnām # RV.6.17.2b; TB.2.5.8.1b; śś.14.23.4.
yaḥ saṃgrāmān (TSṃS. -maṃ) nayati (KS. jayati) saṃ yudhe vaśī (AVP. saṃyuge, putting erroneously vaśī with the next pāda; TSṃS. saṃ vaśī yudhe; KS. saṃ vaśī yudhā) # AVś.4.24.7a; AVP.4.39.7a; TS.4.7.15.2a; MS.3.16.5a: 190.12; KS.22.15a.
yāṃ janāḥ pratinandanti # PG.3.2.2a; ApMB.2.20.27a,29 (ApG.8.22.1); HG.2.17.2a; MG.2.8.4a. See yāṃ devāḥ etc.
yāni kāni ca cakṛma # MS.1.2.10d: 20.11; 2.7.10d: 89.1; Apś.11.12.3d (ca wanting in mss.).
yāṃ devāḥ pratinandanti (SMB. paśyanti) # AVś.3.10.2a; AVP.1.104.2a; SMB.2.2.17a. See yāṃ janāḥ.
rādhasā coditārā matīnām # RV.5.43.9c.
viśvāsāṃ janitārā matīnām # RV.6.69.2a; Aś.6.7.6.
hastini dvīpini yā hiraṇye # AVś.6.38.2a; AVP.2.18.2a; KS.36.15a; TB.2.7.7.1a.
yuktvā vṛṣabhyāṃ vṛṣabha kṣitīnām # RV.1.177.3c.
yuvāṃ hi yantīndavaḥ # RV.4.47.2c; SV.2.979c.
yuvāku sumatīnām # RV.1.17.4b.
yuṣmān devīr deva ā kṣayatīnduḥ # AVP.6.3.8c.
ye arvāvatīndavaḥ # RV.8.53 (Vāl.5).3d.
ye usriyā bibhṛtho ye vanaspatīn # AVś.4.26.5a; AVP.4.36.4a.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"tin" has 374 results
atinicṛta variety of the Gāyatri metre consisting of 20 syllables, confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI.22.
ekapātincombined together; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) commentary एकपातिनः एकीभूतस्य अक्षरस्य क्रमे ध्रुवमाषीं लुप्यते; Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI. 25, also XVII.26.
ktinkṛt affix ति added to roots to form nouns in the sense of verbaction; exempli gratia, for example कृति:, स्थितिः, मति: et cetera, and others;confer, compare P.III.3.94-97.
gatinighātathe grave ( अनुदात्त ) accent of the गति word before a verb with an acute ( उदात्त ) accent; confer, compare तिङिचोदात्तवति P. VIII.1.71.
gadādharacakravartinthe reputed Naiyāyika who wrote numerous works on the Navyanyaya; he has written a few works like व्युत्पत्तिवाद, उपसर्गविचार, कारकनिर्णय, सर्वनामविचार, प्रत्ययविचार on Vyākaraṇa themes although the treatment, as also the style, is logical.
nimittinan affix or an augment or a substitute taking place on account of certain formal causes or nimittas; confer, compare निर्ज्ञातार्थो निमित्तमनिर्ज्ञातार्थो निमित्ती, इह च प्रत्ययोऽनिर्ज्ञातः प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयो निर्ज्ञाताः M. BSh. on III. l . l Vart. 2.
prakṛtiniyamarestriction regarding the base, as contrasted with प्रत्ययनियम, confer, compare किमयं प्रत्ययनियम: प्रकृतिपर एव प्रत्ययः प्रयोक्तव्यः अप्रकृतिपरो नेति । अाहोस्वित् प्रकृतिनियमः । प्रत्ययपरैव प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या अप्रत्ययप्ररा नेति [ M.Bh. on P.III. 1.2.
pratinirdiśyamānapredicate, as opposed to the subject; confer, compare उद्देश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमानघौरेक्यमापादयत्सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तैल्लिङ्गभाक् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).Pradipa.
pratyāsattinyāyaor प्रत्यासतिवचन a dictum that a word should, as fair as possible, be construed with the nearest word; confer, compare अनन्तरस्य विधिः प्रतिषेधो वेत्यर्थः प्रतिपत्तिन्यायलभ्यः Sira. Pari. 48.
pravṛttinimittacause of the application of a word which is shown by the word when the affix त्च or ता is added to it: confer, compare तस्य भावस्त्वतलौ । शब्दस्य प्रवृत्तिनिमित्तं भावशब्देनोच्यते, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 1.119. There are given four such causes जाति, गुण, क्रिया and संज्ञा ।
vatinirdeśaspecific statement by putting the word वत् for the sake of extended application ( अतिदेश ) ; exempli gratia, for example ब्राह्मणवदधीते: confer, compare स तर्हि वतिनिदेश: कर्तव्यः । न ह्यन्तरेण वतिमातदेशो गम्यते । M.Bh.on P. I.1.23 Vart. 4.
vartinfrom वर्त which means a compound;see वर्त, (l) The term वर्तिन् or वर्तिपद is used in the sense of a member of a compound;confer, compareवर्तोस्यास्तीति वर्ति समासावयवभूतम् Nyasa on P. II. 4.1 5. (2) The term वर्तिन् is also used for a syllable ( अक्षरम् ); confer, compare वर्ति R.T.47, explained by the commentator as अकारादिषु वर्तते व्य़ञ्जनं वर्ति चाप्यक्षरं भवति | confer, compare also गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वे Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVIII.32.
vyāptinyāyathe general method of taking a comprehensive sense instead of a restricted one in places of doubt; confer, compare व्याप्तिन्यायाद्वा Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 2. 168.
a(1)the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.
aḥ( : )visarga called visarjanīya in ancient works and shown in writing by two dots, one below the other, exactly of the same size, like the pair of breasts of a maiden as jocularly larly expressed by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. confer, compare अः ( : ) इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः । कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसजर्नीयसंज्ञो भवति ( दुर्गसिंह on कातन्त्र I.1.16). विसर्ग is always a dependent letter included among the Ayogavāha letters and it is looked upon as a vowel when it forms a part of the preceding vowel; while it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into the Jihvāmūlīya or the Upadhmānīya letter.
a,k(ೱ),(ೱ)जिह्वामूलीय, represented by a sign like the वज्र in writing, as stated by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. who remarks वज्राकृतिर्वर्णो जिह्वामूलीयसंज्ञो भवति. the Jihvāmūlīya is only a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the guttural letter क् or ख् . It is looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant. e. g. विष्णु ೱ करोति.
ak(1)condensed expression (प्रत्याहार ) representing the letters अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ in Pāṇini's Grammar confer, compare P. VI.1.12, 101; VII.4.2. (2) sign (विकरण) of the benedictive in Vedic Literature in the case of the root दृश् c. g. पितरं च दृशेयं P.III.l.86 V 2; ( 3 ) remnant of the termnination अकच् P. V. 3. 71 ; ( 4 ) substitute (अादेश) अकङ् for the last vowel of the word मुधातृ ( P.IV.1.97 ) e. g. सोघातकिः.
akartṛa case-relation excepting that of the subject to the verbal activity. confer, compare अकर्तरि च कारके संज्ञायाम् P. III.3.I9.
aṅkitanot possessing the mute letter k (क्) or g (ग्) orṅ ( ङ् ) and hence not preventing the guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, if they occur. e. g. मृजेर ङ्कित्सु प्रत्ययेषु मृजिप्रसङगे मार्जिः साधुर्भुवति M.Bh. on P. I.I.I Vart.10.
akṣadyūtādigaṇaa class of words headed by अक्षद्यूत which take the taddhita affix. affix hak ( इक) in the sense of 'resulting from' e. g. अाक्षद्यूतिकं वैरम्, जानुप्रहृतिक्रम्, गातागार्तकम् et cetera, and others confer, compare P IV.4.19.
akṣarasamāmnāyaalphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ,ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.
acthe short term or pratyāhāra in Pāṇini's Grammar representing a vowel, exempli gratia, for example अजन्त (ending with a vowel), अच्संधि (vowel coalescence or combination).
aṭ(1)token term standing for vowels and semi-vowels excepting l ( ल्) specially mentioned as not interfering with the substitution of ṇ ( ण् ) for n ( न् ) exempli gratia, for example गिरिणा, आर्येण, खर्वेण et cetera, and others Sec P.VIII.4.2; (2) augment a (अट्) with an acute accent, which is prefixed to verbal forms in the imperfect and the aorist tenses and the conditional mood. exempli gratia, for example अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् Sec P.IV.4.71; (3) augment a ( अट् ) prescribed in the case of the roots रुद्, स्वप् et cetera, and others before a Sārvadhātuka affix beginning with any consonant except y ( य्), exempli gratia, for example अरोदत्, अस्वपत्, अजक्षत्, आदत् et cetera, and others; see P.VII.3, 99, 100;(4) augment a ( अट् ) prefixed sometimes in Vedic Literature to affixes of the Vedic subjunctive (लेट्) exempli gratia, for example तारिवत्, मन्दिवत् et cetera, and others see P.III.4.94.
atantraimplying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; exempli gratia, for example ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: confer, compare also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not necessarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quoted it from the writings of Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and the earlier grammarians See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.
atikramapassing over a word in the क्रमपाठ without repeating it; passing beyond, confer, compare अतिक्रम्य परिग्रहः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X.7, which means catching a word for repetition by coming back after passing over it, e. g. इन्द्राग्नी अपात् । इन्द्राग्नी इति इन्द्राग्नी । or अनु दक्षि । दक्षि दावने | दक्षीति दक्षि ।
aātidhṛtione of the varieties of Aticchandas consisting of 76 syllables. e. g. स हि शर्धो न मारुते तुविष्वाणिः Ṛk. Saṁh. I.127.6.
ativyaktaquite distinct; used with respect to pronunciation नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII.8.
atiśakvarīa variety of Aticchandas metre consisting of 60 syllables. e. g. सुषुमा यातमद्रिभिः Ṛk. Saṁh. I. 137.1. cf, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) KVI.82.
atiśāyanaexcellence, surpassing; the same as अतिशय in Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 2 confer, compare अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ P. V. 3.55, also confer, compare भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेऽतिशायने । संसर्गेऽ स्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादय: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V.2.94, where अतिशायन means अतिशाय. Patañjali, commenting on P. V.3.55 clearly remarks that for अतिशय, or for अतिशयन, the old grammarians, out of fancy only, used the term अतिशायन as it was a current term in popular usage; confer, compare देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते यावद् ब्रूयात् प्रकर्षे अतिशय इति तावदतिशायन इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on , P. V.3.55.
atyaṣṭia variety of Aticchandas metre consisting of 68 syllables. e. g. अथा रुचा हरिण्या पुनानः Ṛk. Sam. 8.111.1.
adṛṣṭanot seen properly; doubtful; indistinct;said with respect to a letter which is not distinctly deciphered in the Saṁhitāpātha: exempli gratia, for example तन्नः ( R. Saṁh. I. 107. 3 ): the last letter त् of तत् is deciphered in the Pada-pātha which is given as तत्न: confer, compare अदृष्टवर्णे प्रथमे चोदकः स्यात् प्रदर्शकः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X. 15.
adviyoniliterally not made up of two elements, and hence, produced with a single effort, an expression used for simple vowels ( समानाक्षर ) such as अ, इ, उ, ऋ, लृ and simple consonants क्, ख्, ग् et cetera, and others as distinguished from diphthongs ( सन्ध्यक्षर ) such as ए, ऐ, ओ, औ and conjunct consonants क्व, ध्र , et cetera, and others which appear to have been termed द्वियोनि confer, compare अपृक्तमेकाक्षरमद्वियोनि यत् R.Pr.XI.3.
adhikāragoverning rule consisting of a word (exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः et cetera, and others) or words (exempli gratia, for example ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे et cetera, and others) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference between अधिकार and परिभाषा; confer, compare अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeatedition The repetition goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्निपाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its influence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional properties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्यकेभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposingular. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; confer, compare सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवाहवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥
adhyātmādiname of a class of words headed by the word अध्यात्मन् to which the taddhita affix. affix ठञ् is added in the sense of 'तत्र भवः' id est, that is found therein, or existing therein. e. g. आध्यात्मिकम्, आधिदैविकम्, et cetera, and otherscf M.Bh. on IV.3.60.
anatidiṣṭanot resulting from any extended application or अतिदेश, confer, compare प्रकृत्याश्रयं अनतिदिष्टं भवति M.Bh. on IV. 1.151.
anavakāśahaving no occasion or scope of application; used in connection with a rule the whole of whose province of application is covered by a general rule, and hence which becomes technically useless, unless it is allowed to set aside the general rule: confer, compare अनवकाशा हि विधयो बाधका भवन्तिrules which have no opportunity of taking effect( without setting aside other rules ) supersede those rules; M.Bh. on V.4.154, also Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. on Pari. 64.
anavakāśatvaabsence of any opportunity of taking effect, scopelessness considered in the case of a particular rule, as a criterion for setting aside that general rule which deprives it of that opportunity confer, compare अनवकाशत्वं निरवकाशत्वं वा बाधकत्वे बीजम्. This अनवकाशत्व is slightly different from अपवादत्व or particular mention which is defined usually by the words सामान्यविधिरुत्सर्गः । विशेषविधिरपवादः ।
anākṛtinot capable of presenting (on its mere utterance) any tangible form or figure the word is used in connection with a technical term (संज्ञाशब्द) which presents its sense by a definition actually laid down or given in the treatise: confer, compare अनाकृति: संज्ञा । अाकृतिमन्तः संज्ञिनः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1.
aniṭ(1)not admitting the augment इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is strictly to be applied to ārdhadhātuka affixes placed after such roots as have their vowel characterized by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the term अनिट् being explained as अनिडादि qualifying the अार्धधातुक affix; (2) in a secondary way, it has become customary to call such roots अनिट् as do not allow the augment इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. Such roots are termed अनुदात्त verily because they are possessed of an anudātta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जि, गम् , हन् et cetera, and others as against भु, धू, तॄ, श्वि, वृ, वद्, फल्, चल्, et cetera, and others which have their vowel characterized by an acute (उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list of such roots see the well-known stanzas given in the Siddhāntakaumudī incidentally on अात्मनेपदेष्वनतः P. VII.1.5. ऊदॄदन्तैर्यौतिरुक्ष्णुशीङ्स्नु....निहताः स्मृताः ॥ १ ॥ शक्लृपच्मुचिरिचवच्विच् .........धातवो द्व्यधिकं शतम् ॥ as also some lists by ancient grammarians given in the Mahābhāṣya on एकाच उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10 or in the Kāśikā on the same rule P. VII.2.10.
aniṭkārikā(1)name given to Stanzas giving a complete list of such roots as do not allow the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. For such Kārikās see Sid. Kaum. on VII.1.5 as also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a short treatise enumerating in 11 verses the roots which do not admit the augment इट् before the ārdhadhatuka affixes. The work is anonymous, and not printed so far, possibly composed by a Jain writer. The work possibly belongs to the Kātantra system and has got short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि, विवरण, टीका, टिप्पणी and the like which are all anonymous.
anunāsika(a letter)uttered through the nose and mouth both, as different from anusvāra which is uttered only through the nose. confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिकःP.I.1.8, and Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). thereon. The anunāsika or nasal letters are the fifth letters of the five classes ( id est, that is ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न्, म् ) as also vowels अ, इ, उ and semivowels when so pronounced, as ordinarily they are uttered through the mouth only; ( exempli gratia, for example अँ, आँ, et cetera, and others or य्यँ, व्वँ, ल्लँ et cetera, and others in सय्यँन्ता, सव्वँत्सरः, सँल्लीनः et cetera, and others) The अनुनासिक or nasalized vowels are named रङ्गवर्ण and they are said to be consisting of three mātras. confer, compare अष्टौ आद्यानवसानेsप्रगृह्यान् आचार्या आहुरनुनासिकान् स्वरान् । तात्रिमात्रे शाकला दर्शयन्ति Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.63.64; confer, compare also अप्रग्रहाः समानाक्षराणि अनुनासिकानि एकेषाम् T. Pr XV.6. Trivikrama, a commentator on the Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Sūtras, explains अनुनासिक as अनु पश्चात् नासिकास्थानं उच्चारणं एषां इत्यनुनासिकाः । पूर्वं मुखस्थानमुच्चारणं पश्चान्नासिकास्थानमुच्चारणमित्यर्थः । अनुग्रहणात्केवलनासिकास्थानोच्चारणस्य अनुस्वारस्य नेयं संज्ञा । and remarks further पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्धसंज्ञेयमन्वर्था । Com. by Tr. on Kat. I 1.13. Vowels which are uttered nasalized by Pāṇini in his works viz. सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ et cetera, and others are silent ones i. e. they are not actually found in use. They are put by him only for the sake of a complete utterance, their nasalized nature being made out only by means of traditional convention. e. g. एध, स्पर्ध et cetera, and others confer, compare उपदेशेSजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2; confer, compare also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः Kāś on I.3.2.
anubandhaa letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् et cetera, and others) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their prevention. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (literally going or disappearing) by Pāṇini (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् et cetera, and others I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, confer, compare अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the analogy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughteredition
anuvartanacontinuation or recurrence of a word from the preceding to the succeeding rule; the same as anuvṛtti; confer, compare अनुवर्तन्ते नाम विधयः । न चानुवर्तनादेव भवन्ति। किं तर्हि । यत्नाद्भवन्तीति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.3.
anuvṛttirepetition or recurrence of a word from the previous to the subsequent rule or rules, which is necessary for the sake of the intended interpretation. The word is of common use in books on Pāṇini's grammar. This recurrence is generally continuous like the stream of a river ( गङ्गास्रोतोवत् ); sometimes however, when it is not required in an intermediate rule, although it proceeds further, it is named मण्डूकप्लुत्यानुवृत्ति. In rare cases it is taken backwards in a sūtra work from a subsequent rule to a previous rule when it is called अपकर्ष.
antaraṅgaparibhāṣāthe phrase is used generally for the परिभाषा "असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे' described a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. See the word अन्तरङ्ग. The परिभाषा has got a very wide field of application and is used several times in setting aside difficulties which present themselves in the formation of a word. Like many other paribhāṣās this paribhāṣā is not a paribhāṣā of universal application.
antaraṅgabalīyastvathe strength which an antaraṅga rule or operation possesses by virtue of which it supersedes all other rules or operations,excepting an apavāda rule, when or if they occur simultaneously in the formation of a word.
anvaya(1)construing, construction: arrangement of words according to their mutual relationship based upon the sense conveyed by them, शब्दानां परस्परमर्थानुगमनम् । (2) continuance, continuation;confer, compare घृतघटतैलवट इति ; निषिक्ते घृते तैले वा अन्वयाद्विशेषणं भवति अयं घृतघटः, अयं तैलघट इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II. 1.1.
anvākarṣakaa word attracting a previous word such as the word च, in the Sūtra texts.
anvādeśakaa word capable of attracting a word or words from previous statements; cf चापीत्यन्वादेशकौ T Pr. KKII.5; same as अन्वाकर्षक.
ap(1)kṛt affix अ, in the sense of verbal activity (भाव) or any verbal relation (कारक) excepting that of an agent, (कर्तृ) applied to roots ending in ऋ or उ and the roots ग्रह्,वृ,दृ et cetera, and others mentioned in P. III.3.58 and the following rules in preference to the usual affix घञ. exempli gratia, for example करः, गरः, शरः, यवः, लवः, पवः, ग्रहः, स्वनः etc, confer, compare P.III, 3.57-87 ; (2) compound-ending अप् applied to Bahuvrīhi compounds in the feminine gender ending with a Pūraṇa affix as also to Bahuvrīhi compounds ending with लोमन् preceded by अन्त् or वहिर् e. g. कल्याणीपञ्चमा रात्रयः, अन्तर्लोमः,बहिर्लोमः पटः confer, compare P. V. 4.116, 117.
apakarṣa(1)deterioration of the place or instrument of the production of sound resulting in the fault called निरस्त; confer, compare स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षेण निरस्तं नाम दोष उत्पद्यते, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2; (2) drawing back a word or words from a succeeding rule of grammar to the preceding one; confer, compare "वक्ष्यति तस्यायं पुरस्तादपकर्षः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.8. (3) inferiority (in the case of qualities) न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षापकर्षौ स्तः ।
apūrva(1)not existing before; confer, compare आगमश्च नाम अपूर्वः शब्दोपजनः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1-20, I.1.46; (2) not preceded by any letter or so, cf अपूर्वलक्षण अादिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.21: (3) a rule prescribing something not prescribed before; confer, compare तत्र अपूर्वो विधिरस्तु नियमोस्तु इति अपूर्व एव विधिर्भविष्यति न नियमः M.Bh. on I.4.3., III.1.46, III.2. 127, III.3.19.
apṛktaliterally unmixed with any (letter); a technical term for an affix consisting of one phonetic element, id est, that is of a single letter. confer, compare अपृक्त एकाल्प्रत्ययः P. I.2.41.
abhivyādānaabsorption of a vowel when two long vowels of the same kind come together exempli gratia, for example ता आपः = तापः, अवसा आ = अवसा, the resultant vowel being pronounced specially long consisting of some more mātrā, which is evidently, a fault of pronunciation. confer, compare आदानं आरम्भः; विपुलं विशालं वा आदानं व्यादानम् । अभिव्याप्तं अभिभूतं व्यादानं अभिव्यादानम् Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 27.
abhyaṃkara(BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a number of Sanskrit scholars in Grammar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyakar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commentaries on books in several Sanskrit Shastras, has written a commentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.
amaracalled अमरसिंह an ancient grammarian mentioned in the कविकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. He is believed to have written some works on grammar such as षट्कारकलक्षण his famous existing work, however, being the Amarakoṣa or Nāmaliṅgānuśāsana.
avagraha(1)separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.
avighātārthameant for not preventing the application (of a particular term) to others where it should apply. The word is frequently used in the Kāśikā; cf अजाद्यतष्टाप् । टकारः सामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थः । Kāś. on P. IV.I.4, also see Kāś. on III.1. 133; III.2,67,73 IV.1.78.
avyakta(1)indistinct; inarticulate; confer, compare अव्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P. VI.1.98 also P.V.4.57; अव्यक्तं अपरिस्फुटवर्णम् Kāś. on P. VI.1.98; (2) a fault of pronunciation confer, compare नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् ।
(1)Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semivowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibilants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginning with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the genitive case singular. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27.
aśvādi(1)a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the affix फञ्(अायन) is added in the sense of गोत्र (grandchildren et cetera, and others); exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायनः जातायनः, औत्सायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.1. 110; (2) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the taddhita affix यत् is added in the sense of a cause of the type of a meeting or an accidental circumstance; exempli gratia, for example आश्विकम् अाश्मिकम् confer, compare P. V.1.39.
aṣṭamaṅgalāname of a commentary on the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa by Rāmakiśoracakravartin.
aṣṭādhyāyīname popularly given to the Sūtrapāṭha of Pāṇini consisting of eight books (adhyāyas) containing in all 3981 Sūtras,as found in the traditional recital, current at the time of the authors of the Kāśika. Out of these 398l Sūtras, seven are found given as Vārtikas in the Mahābhāṣya and two are found in Gaṇapāṭha.The author of the Mahābhāṣya has commented upon only 1228 of these 3981 sūtras. Originally there were a very few differences of readings also, as observed by Patañjali ( see Mbh on I.4.1 ); but the text was fixed by Patañjali which, with a few additions made by the authors of the Kāśika,as observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., has traditionally come down to the present day. The Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is believed to be one of the six Vedāṅga works which are committed to memory by the reciters of Ṛgveda. The text of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is recited without accents. The word अष्टाध्यायी was current in Patañjali's time; confer, compare शिष्टज्ञानार्था अष्टाध्यायी Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 3.109.
aṣṭiname of a metre of four feet consisting of 64 syllables in all, 12 syllables in the odd feet and 20 in the even feet; e. g. त्रिकद्रुकेषु महिषः et cetera, and others Ṛgveda, Ṛk. Saṁh=Ṛgveda-saṁhita. II.22.1.
asaṃnikarṣa(1)separatedness as in the case of two distinct words;(2) absence of co-alescence preventing the sandhi; cf R.T. 68,70.
asarvavibhaktinot admitting all caseaffixes to be attached to it; confer, compare तद्धितश्चासर्वविभक्ति: P.I.1.38: यस्मान्न सर्वविभक्तेरुत्पत्तिः सोसर्वविभक्तिः । ततः यतः तत्र यत्र । Kāś. on I.1.38.
ā(1)the long form of the vowel अ called दीर्घ,consisting of two mātrās, in contrast with (l) the short अ which consists of one mātrā and the protracted आ३ which consists of three mātrās; (2) substitute अा of two mātrās when prescribed by the word दीर्घ or वृद्धि for the short vowel अ; (3) upasarga अा (अाङ्) in the sense of limit exempli gratia, for example अा कडारादेका संज्ञा (P.I.4.1.) आकुमारं यशः पाणिनेः K. on II.1.13. आ उदकान्तात् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.14.) (4) indeclinable आ in the sense of remembrance e. g. आ एवं नु मन्यसे; confer, compare ईषदर्थे क्रियायोगे मर्यादाभिविधौ च यः । एतमातं ङितं विद्याद्वाक्यस्मरणयोरङित् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.14; (5) augment अा ( अाक् ) as seen in चराचर, वदावद et cetera, and others confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VI.1.12 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6; (6) augment अा(आट्) prefixed to roots in the tenses लुङ्, लङ् and लृङ् (7) substitute अा prescribed for the last letter of pronouns before the taddhita affix. affixes दृक्,दृश, दृक्ष and वत्, as in तादृक्दृ, तादृश et cetera, and others; (8) feminine affix आ (टाप्, डाप् or चाप् ) added to nouns ending in अा; (9) substitute आ ( आ or अात्, or डा or आल् ) for case affixes in Vedic literature उभा यन्तारौ, नाभा पृथिव्याः et cetera, and others
ākarṣaka( a word )attracting another word stated previously in the context e. g. the word च in the rules of Pāṇini.
ākṛtiliterally form; individual thing; confer, compare एकस्या अाकृतेश्चरितः प्रयोगो द्वितीयस्यास्तृतीयस्याश्च न भवति M.Bh on III.1.40 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).6. The word is derived as आक्रियते सा आकृतिः and explained as संस्थानम्; confer, compare आक्रियते व्यज्यते अनया इति आकृतिः संस्थानमुच्यते Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on IV.1.63; (2) general form which, in a way, is equivalent to the generic notion or genus; confer, compare आकृत्युपदेशात्सिद्धम् । अवर्णाकृतिरुपदिष्टा सर्वमवर्णकुलं ग्रहीष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).I.1 Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. 1; (3) notion of genus; cf also यत्तर्हि तद् भिन्नेष्वभिन्नं छिनेष्वच्छिन्नं सामान्यभूतं स शब्दः । नेत्याह । अाकृतिर्नाम सा. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya.1; (4) a metre consisting of 88 letters; confer, compare R. Prāt. XVI.56,57.
aākhyātaverbal form, verb; confer, compare भावप्रधानमाख्यातं सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि Nirukta of Yāska.I.1; चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्यातोपसर्गनिपाताश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1. Āhnika 1 ; also A.Prāt. XII. 5, अाकार अाख्याते पदादिश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.2.37 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2, आख्यातमाख्यातेन क्रियासातत्ये Sid. Kau. on II.1.72, क्रियावाचकमाख्यातं Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1; confer, compare भारद्वाजकमाख्यातं भार्गवं नाम भाष्यते । भारद्वाजेन दृष्टत्वादाख्यातं भारद्वाजगोत्रम् V. Prāt. VIII. 52; confer, compare also Athar. Prāt.I.I.12, 18; 1.3.3,6; II.2.5 where ākhyāta means verbal form. The word also meant in ancient days the root also,as differentiated from a verb or a verbal form as is shown by the lines तन्नाम येनाभिदधाति सत्त्वं, तदाख्यातं येन भावं स धातुः R.Pr.XII.5 where 'आख्यात' and 'धातु' are used as synonyms As the root form such as कृ, भृ et cetera, and others as distinct from the verbal form, is never found in actual use, it is immaterial whether the word means root or verb.In the passages quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. from the Nirukta and the Mahābhāṣya referring to the four kinds of words, the word ākhyāta could be taken to mean root (धातु) or verb (क्रियापद). The ākhyāta or verb is chiefly concerned with the process of being and bccoming while nouns (नामानि) have sattva or essence, or static element as their meaning. Verbs and nouns are concerned not merely with the activities and things in this world but with every process and entity; confer, compare पूर्वापूरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेनाचष्टे Nir.I.;अस्तिभवतिविद्यतीनामर्थः सत्ता । अनेककालस्थायिनीति कालगतपौर्वापर्येण क्रमवतीति तस्याः क्रियात्वम् । Laghumañjūṣā. When a kṛt (affix). affix is added to a root, the static element predominates and hence a word ending with a kṛt (affix). affix in the sense of bhāva or verbal activity is treated as a noun and regularly declined;confer, compareकृदभिहितो भावे द्रव्यवद् भवति M.Bh. on II.2.19 and III. 1.67, where the words गति, व्रज्या, पाक and others are given as instances. Regarding indeclinable words ending with kṛt (affix). affixes such as कर्तुं, कृत्वा, and others, the modern grammarians hold that in their case the verbal activity is not shadowed by the static element and hence they can be,in a way, looked upon as ākhyātas; confer, compare अव्ययकृतो भावे Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa.
aāgantukaliterally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.
aāṅgaan operation prescribed in the section, called aṅgādhikāra, in the the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, made up of five Pādas consisting of the fourth quarter of the 6th adhyāya and all the four quarters of the seventh adhyāya. आङ्गात् पूर्वं विकरणा एषितव्याः M. Bh on I.3.60 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5; confer, compare also वार्णादाङ्गं बलीयो भवति Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari 55: also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2.3.
ācāra(1)customary usage of putting or employing words in rules; confer, compare आचार्याचारात्संज्ञासिद्धिः, P.I,1.1, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4. (2) behaviour;confer, compare उपमानादाचारे P.III. 1.10; cf also निवासत आचारतश्च M.Bh. on VI.3.109.
ānantarya(1)close proximity; absence of any intermediary element generally of the same nature: अनन्तरस्य भावः आनन्तर्यम्; confer, compare नाजानन्तर्ये वहिष्ट्वप्रक्लृप्तिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.4.2. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 21: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 51. This close proximity of one letter or syllable or so, with another, is actually id est, that isphonetically required and generally so found out also, but sometimes such proximity is theoretically not existing as the letter required for proximity is technically not present there by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम्. In such cases, a technical absence is not looked upon as a fault. confer, compare कचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्ये शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्ये यथा ष्टुत्वे, क्वचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि शास्त्रकृतं यथा जश्त्वे । यत्र कुतश्चिदेवानन्तर्यं तदाश्रयिष्यामः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VIII.3.13. (2) close connection by mention together at a common place et cetera, and others;confer, compare सर्वाद्यानन्तर्यं कार्यार्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.27.
aāpatti(1)production; resulting of something into another; change; cf दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिः नतिः मूर्धन्यापत्तिः मूर्धन्यभावः V. Prāt. I. 42 and Uvaṭa's commentary thereon; cf also यमापत्तिं explained as यमभावं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 9. (2) modification; confer, compare अापद्यते श्वासतां नादतां वा R.Pr.XIII.1.; (3) contingency, undesired result.
abādha(1)similarity of one phonetic element, for instance, in the case of ऐ with आ resulting from Saṁdhi: e. g. प्रजाया अरातिं निर्ऋत्या अकः where प्रजाया and निर्ऋत्या stand for प्रजायै and निर्ऋत्यै confer, compare एकारान्तानि अाकारबाधे Āth. Pr. II.1.4; (2) Similarity of accent of words in the Saṁhitāpāṭha and Padapāṭha; (3) followed by confer, compare Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.1.14; (4) distress; confer, compare आबाधे च, P. VIII.1.10.
aāmantrita(1)a word in the vocative singular. confer, compare सामन्त्रितम् P.II.3.48: a tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar, the peculiar features of which are पराङ्गवद्भाव (confer, compare P.II.1.2), अविद्यमानवद्भाव (confer, compare P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (confer, compare P.VIII. 1.8), अद्युदात्तत्व (confer, compare P.VI.1.198), सर्वानुदात्तत्व(confer, compare P.VIII.1.19), splitting of ए into अा and इ, exempli gratia, for example अग्रे into अग्ना ३ इ (confer, compare P.VIII.2.107 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3); (2) Vocative case, confer, compare ओकार अामन्त्रितजः प्रगृह्यः Ṛk. Prāt. I.28; Vāj. Pr. III.139: II.17: II.24 VI.1.
i(1)the vowel इ, representing all its eighteen forms viz. short, long protracted, acute, grave, circumflex, pure and nasalised; exempli gratia, for example इ in यस्येति च P.VI.4.128;(2) Uṅādi affix ई(3)tad-affix इच्(इ)applied to Bahuvrihi compounds in the sense of exchange of action or as seen in words like द्विदण्डि exempli gratia, for example केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि, द्विमुसलि et cetera, and others confer, compare इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127,also V.4.128; (4) kṛt (affix). affix कि (इ) confer, compare उपसर्गे घोः किः P.III.3.92; (5) augment इट् (इ); see इट् (6) conjugational affix इट् of the 1st person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada
ikpadopasthitithe presence of the word इक् (vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ) in a rule, where the operations गुण and वृद्धि are prescribed by putting the words गुण and वृद्धि; exempli gratia, for example सिचि वृद्धिः परस्मैपदेषु P.VII.2.1; confer, compare इको गुणवृद्वी P.I.1.3.
iṅgyaa separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): confer, compare इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा commentary on Tait. Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48.
it(1)a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217,ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.
itaretarapossessed of interdependence; depending upon each other; confer, compare इतरेतरं कार्यमसद्वत् Candra Pari. 5 }. Grammatical operations are of no avail if the rules stating them are mutually depending on each other. The word इतरेतर has the sense of इतरेतराश्रय here.
īdit(a root)possessed of long ई as a mute indicatory ending meant for prohibiting the addition of the augment इ to the past participle. terminations त and तवत् ; exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, दीप्तः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.2.14.
ujjvaladattathe famous commentator on the Uṅādi sūtras. His work .is called Uṅādisūtravṛtti, which is a scholarly commentary on the Uṅādisūtrapāṭha, consisting of five Pādas. Ujjvaldatta is belived to have lived in the l5th century A.D. He quotes Vṛttinyāsa, Anunyāsa, Bhāgavṛtti et cetera, and others He is also known by the name Jājali.
(1)short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for vowels excepting अ and इ, semivowels, nasal consonants and the consonants ह् झ् and भ्.; cf भय उञो वो वा P. VIII.3.33; (2) the particle उ; confer, compare उञि च पदे P.VIII.3.21, also उञः P.1.I.17.
uṇādiaffixes headed by the affix उण्, which are similar to kṛt affixes of Pāṇini, giving derivation mostly of such words as are not derived by rules of Pāṇini. No particular sense such as agent, object et cetera, and others is mentioned in connection with these affixes, but, as Pāṇini has stated in 'ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः P.III. 4.75, the various Uṇādi affixes are applied to the various roots as prescribed in any Kāraka sense, except the संप्रदान and the अपादान; in other words, any one of the senses, agent, object, instrument and abode, is assigned to the Uṇādi affix as suits the meaning of the word. Although some scholars believe that the Uṇādi affixes are given by a grammarian later than Pāṇini as there are words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others included in the list of Uṇādi words and that there are many interpolated Sūtras, still the Uṇādi collection must be looked upon as an old one which is definitely mentioned by Pāṇini in two different rules; confer, compare Pāṇini उणादयो बहुलम् P. III.3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः III.4.76. Patañjali has given a very interesting discussion about these Uṇādi affixes and stated on the strength of the Vārttika, तत्रोणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these affixes and the words given in the Uṇādi collection should not be considered as genuinely deriveditionThe derivation is not a very systematic and logically correct one and therefore for practical purposes, the words derived by the application of the affixes उण् and others should be looked upon as underived; confer, compare उणादयोSव्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on. P.I.1.16, III.4.77, IV.1.1, VI.1.62, VII.1.2, VII.2.8 et cetera, and others There is a counterstatement also seen in the Mahābhāṣya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि, representing the other view prevailing at the time; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.I.133; but not much importance seems to be attached to it. The different systems of grammar have different collections of such words which are also known by the term Uṇādi. Out of the collections belonging to Pāṇini's system, three collections are available at present, the collection into five pādas given in the printed edition of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, the collection into ten Pādas given in the printed edition of the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the collection in the Sarasvatīkaṇthābharaṇa of Bhoja forming Pādas 1, 2 and 3 of the second Adhyāya of the work.
uttama(1)the best,the highest,the last: (2) the last letter of the consonantclasses, the nasal; cf, A.Pr.II.4.14; R.Pr.IV.3; confer, compare also अनुत्तम meaning non-nasal; (3) the उत्तमपुरुष or the premier or the first person constituting the affixes मि, वस् and मस् and their substitutes, confer, compare P.I.4.107.
uddeśyareferred to; pointed out, subject, as contrasted with the predicate मानान्तरप्राप्तमुद्देश्यम् ; confer, compare उद्दश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमानयोरैक्यमापद्यत् सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तल्लिङभाक् । तद्यथा | शैत्यं हि यत्सा प्रकृतिर्जलस्य, शैत्यं हि य यत्तत्प्रकृतिर्जलस्य वा । उद्देश्य in grammar refers to the subjectpart of a sentence as opposed to the predicate-participle. In the sentence वृद्धिरादैच् the case is strikingly an opposite one and the explanation given by Patañjali is very interesting;confer, compare तदेतदेकं मङ्गलार्थं आचार्यस्य मृष्यताम् । माङ्गलिक अाचार्यः महतः शास्त्रौघस्य मङ्गलार्थं वृद्धिशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्कते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.1.
upadhmānīyaa letter or a phonetic element substituted for a visarga followed by the first or the second letter of the labial class. Visarga is simply letting the breath out of the mouth. Where the visarga is followed by the first or the second letter of the labial class, its pronunciation is coloured by labial utterance. This coloured utterance cannot be made independently; hence this utterance called 'उपध्मानीय' ( similar to a sound blown from the mouth ) is not put in, as an independent letter, in the वर्णसमाम्नाय attributed to महेश्वर. Patañjali, however, has referred to such dependent utterances by the term अयोगवाहवर्ण. See अयेागवाह; confer, compare xक इति जिह्वामूलीयः । जिह्वामूलेन जन्यत्वात् । xप इत्युपध्मानीयः । उपध्मानेन जन्यत्वात्. अयेगवाह is also called अर्धविसर्ग. See अर्धविसर्ग.
upapadaliterallya word placed near; an adjoining word. In Pāṇini's grammar, the term उपपद is applied to such words as are put in the locative case by Pāṇini in his rules prescribing kṛt affixes in rules from 1 II. 1, 90 to III. 4 end; confer, compare तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम् P.III.1.92; exempli gratia, for example कर्मणि in कर्मण्यण् P. III.2.1. The word is also used in the sense of an adjoining word connected in sense. e. g. युष्मद्युपपदे as also प्रहासे च मन्योपपदे P.I.4.105,106; confer, compare also क्रियार्थायां क्रियायामुपपदे धातोर्भविष्यति काले तुमुन्ण्वुलौ भवतः Kāś. on P.III.3.10; confer, compare also इतरेतरान्योन्योपपदाच्च P.I.3.10, मिथ्योपपदात् कृञोभ्यासे P.I.3.71, as also उपपदमतिङ् P.II.2.19; and गतिकारकोपपदात्कृत् P. VI.2.139. Kaiyaṭa on P.III.1. 92 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2 explains the word उपपद as उपोच्चारि or उपोच्चारितं पदं उपपदम्. The word उपपद is found used in the Prātiśākhya literature where it means a word standing near and effecting some change: confer, compare च वा ह अह एव एतानि चप्रभृतीनि यान्युपपदानि उक्तानि आख्यातस्य विकारीणिo Uvaṭa on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI. 23.
upapadavibhaktia case termination added to a word on account of the presence of another word requiring the addition;confer, compare the well-known Paribhāṣā,उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी. Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 94; and M.Bh. on I.4. 96 stating the possession of greater force in the case of a kāra-kavibhakti than in the case of an upapadavibhakti.
upasaṃkhyānamention, generally of the type of the annexation of some words to words already given, or of some limiting conditions or additions to what has been already statedition The word is often found at the end of the statements made by the Vārttikakāra on the sūtras of Pāṇini.: confer, compare P.I.1.29 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1: I.1.36 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3 et cetera, and others The words वाच्य and वक्तव्य are also similarly useditionThe word is found similarly used in the Mahābhāṣya also very frequently.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
vupasargavicāraa treatise on upasargas by Gadādhara Cakravartin.
upasthānaoccurrence: prescnce by virtue of anuvṛtti i. e. recurrence or continuation of a word in the rules that follow; confer, compare शब्देन चाप्यधिकृतेन कोन्यो व्यापारः शक्योवगन्तुमन्यदतो योगे योग उपस्थानात् M.Bh. on 1.3.11 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1.
upodbalakaa supporting assertion or statement; cf तस्यैवोपोद्बलकमेतत् M.Bh. on I.2.64. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 38-39.
ubhayataspāśāpresenting a difficulty in both the ways; confer, compare सैषा उभयतस्पाशा रज्जुर्भवति M.Bh. on VI.1.68.
ūṅfeminine. affix ऊ prescribed after masculine nouns ending in the vowel ऊ and denoting a human being as also after some other specific masculine bases cf ऊङुतः P.IV. I.66 and the following sūtras. exempli gratia, for example कुरूः, पङ्गूः श्वश्रूः, करभोरूः, भद्रबाहूः et cetera, and others
ūnadeficient, wanting; often in compounds exempli gratia, for example पादोन, ह्यून, एकोन; confer, compare व्यूहैः संपत्समीक्ष्योने Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VIII. 28; एकह्यूनाधिकता सैव निवृदूनाधिका भुरिक् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII.1.
ṛktantraa work consisting of five chapters containing in all 287 sūtras. It covers the same topics as the Prātiśākhya works and is looked upon as one of the Prātiśākhya works of the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is attributed to Śākaṭāyana according to Nageśa, while औदिव्राज is held as its author by some, and कात्यायन by others. It bears a remarkable similarity to Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. especially in topics concerning coalescence and changes of स् and न् to ष् and ण् respectively. It cannot be definitely said whether it preceded or followed Pāṇini's work.
ṛṣicchandsthe metre of the Vedic seers. The seven metres गायत्री, उष्णिक्, अनुष्टुप्, बृहती, पङ्क्ति, त्रिष्टुप् and जगती consisting respectively of 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 syllables are named ऋषिच्छन्दस् as contrasted with the metres दैव, प्राजापत्य and आसुर, which, when combined together, make the metres of the Vedic seers, For details see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI.1.5.
ekapadamade up of one word; consisting of one word; confer, compare अथवा सन्त्येकपदान्यप्यवधारणानि । यथा अब्भक्षो वायुभक्षः । अप एव भक्षयति वायुमव भक्षयति । M.Bh. first Āhnika; (2) a continuous word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and समानपद by commentators; confer, compare तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18: (3) every individual word: confer, compare बहुक्रमे क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि नि:सृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.
ekaśrutithat which has got the same accent or tone; utterance in the same tone; monotone. The word is applied to the utterance of the vocative noun or phrase calling a man from a distance, as also to that of the vowels or syllables following a Svarita vowel in the Saṁhitā id est, that is the continuous utterance of Vedic sentences; confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali has given three alternative views about the accent of Ekaśruti syllables : (a) they possess an accent between the उदात्त (acute) and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are in the same accent as is possessed by the preceding vowel, (c) Ekaśruti is looked upon as the seventh of the seven accents; confer, compare सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुतिरन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति | उदात्तः, उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.
ekākṣaraconsisting of one single syllable ; exempli gratia, for example स्व, भू, वाच् et cetera, and others confer, compare एकाक्षरात्कृते जातेः सप्तम्यां च न तौ स्मृतौ M.Bh. on P.V.2.115, as also on VI.1.168, VI.4.161.
ekībhāvafusion, mixture, union, combination (of 2 or more letters); confer, compare उदात्तवति एकीभावे उदात्तं सन्ध्यमक्षरम्, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)III.6.एकीभाव is said to be resulting from the coalescence called अभिनिहितसन्धि, confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.16, 17.
eṇīkṛtaA fault in pronunciation when the voice is indistinct, and the word pronounced is not distinctly heard; confer, compare एणीकृतः अविशिष्टः । किमयमोकारः अथौकार इति यत्र संदेहः Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on M.Bh.I.1.1,explained as अवशिष्ट: संश्लिष्टः संदिग्ध इति यावत् by Nāgeśa in his Uddyota.
autsargikaan affix or an operation resulting from the general rule ( उत्सर्ग ); confer, compare अपत्ये कुत्सिते मूढे मनौरोत्सर्गिकः स्मृत: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.161 ; confer, compare also एवमप्यौत्सर्गिकाणां तद्विषयता न प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.66.
aupacārikaresulting from उपचार or लक्षणा ; metonymical.
aupamikafigurative metaphorical application or statement: confer, compare ( विराट् ) पिपीलिकमध्या इत्यौपमिकम् Nirukta of Yāska.VII. 13. औपश्लेषिक resulting from immediate contact immediately or closely connected; one of the three types of अधिकरण or location which is given as the sense of the locative case; confer, compare अधिकरणं नाम त्रिप्रकारं-व्यापकम् ओपश्लेषिकम्, वैषयिकमिति ... इको यणचि | अचि उपाश्लिष्टस्येति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VI. 1.72.
{{c|-( anusvāra ) ṃanusvāraor nasal (l) looked upon as a phonetic element, independent, no doubt, but incapable of being pronounced without a vowel Preceding it. Hence, it is shown in writing with अ although its form in writing is only a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the line cf अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणर्थ इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk I.1.19; (2) anusvāra,showing or signifying Vikāra id est, that is अागम and used as a technical term for the second विभक्ति or the accusative case. See the word अं a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 1.
or विसर्गः literally letting out breath from the mouth; sound or utterance caused by breath escaping from the mouth; breathing. The Visarjanīya, just like the anusvāra, is incapable of being independently utteredition Hence, it is written for convenience as अः although its form for writing purposes is only two dots after the vowel preceding it; confer, compare अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसर्जनीयसंज्ञो भवति । Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk. I.1.16. See अः a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 2.
ᳶ upadhmānīyaliterally blowing; a term applied to the visarga when followed by the consonant प् or फ्. The upadhmānīya is looked upon as a letter or phonetic element, which is always connected with the preceding vowel. As the upadhmānīya is an optional substitute for the visarga before the letter प् or फ्, when, in writing, it is to be shown instead of the visarga, it is shown as ᳶ, or as w , or even as x just as the Jihvāmūlīya; confer, compare उपध्मायते शब्दायते इति, उप समीपे ध्मायते शब्द्यते इति वा commentary on Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I:; : confer, compare also कपाभ्यां प्रागर्धविसर्गसदृशो जिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयौः:S.K.on P.VIII.2.1.
yamaa letter called यम which is uttered partly through the nose. A class consonant excepting the fifth, when followed by the fifth viz. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न or म् , gets doubled in the Vedic recital, when the second of the doubled consonant which is coloured by the following nasal consonant is called यम. This यम letter is not independent. It necessarily depends upon the following nasal consonant and hence it is called अयोगवाह. The nasalization is shown in script as xx followed by the consonant; e. g. पलिक्क्नी, अगूग्रे, et cetera, and others The pronunciation of this yama or twin letter is seen in the Vedic recital only; confer, compare पलिक्कनी ... कखगघेभ्य; परे तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII. 2.1. confer, compare कु खु गु घु इति यमाः विंशतिसंख्याका भवन्ति Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.24.
karmadhārayaname technically given to a compound-formation of two words in apposition i. e. used in the same case, technically called समानाधिकरण showing the same substratutm; confer, compare तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः I 2.42. The karmadhāraya compound is looked upon as a variety of the tatpuruṣa compound. There is no satisfactory explanation of the reason why such a compound is termed कर्मधारय. Śākaṭāyana defines Karmadhāraya as विशेषणं व्यभिचारि एकार्थं कर्मधारयश्च where the word विशेषण is explained as व्यावर्तक or भेदक (distinguishing attribute) showing that the word कर्म may mean भेदकक्रिया. The word कर्मधारय in that case could mean 'कर्म भेदकक्रिया, तां धारयति असौ कर्मधारयः' a compound which gives a specification of the thing in hand.
kalaa fault of pronunciation consequent upon directing the tongue to a place in the mouth which is not the proper one, for the utterance of a vowel; a vowel so pronounced; confer, compare संवृतः कलो ध्मात: ... रोमश इति confer, comparealso निवृत्तकलादिकामवर्णस्य प्रत्यापत्तिं वक्ष्यामि M.Bh. Āhnika 1.
kavargathe class of guttural consonants consisting of the five consonants क्, ख्, ग्, घ् ङ्
kātantraparibhāṣāpāṭhaname given to a text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras, believed to have been written by the Sūtrakāra himself as a supplementary portion to the main grammar. Many such lists of Paribhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly in manuscript form, containing more than a hundred Sūtras divided into two main groups-the Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābalasūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.
kātantrapariśiṣṭacandrikāa gloss on the Kātantra-Pariśiṣṭa ascribed to a scholar named Ramadāsa-cakravartin who has written another...work also named Kātantravyākhyāsāra.
kātantravṛttivyākhyānamed Aṣṭamaṅgalā on Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.'s Kātantravṛtti written by Rāmakiśora Cakravartin who is believed to have written a grammatical work शाब्दबोधप्रकाशिका.
kātantravyākhyāsāraa work of the type of a summary written by Rāmadāsa Cakravartin of the twelfth century.
kārakanirṇayaa work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.
kāryakālaalong with the operation; confer, compare कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् , rules laying down technical terms and regulating rules are to be interpreted along with the rules that prescribe or enjoin operations ( provided the technical terms occur in those rules, or, the regulating rules concern those rules). See Pari. Śek. Pari 3.
kit(1)marked with the mute letter क् which is applied by Pāṇini to affixes, for preventing guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes to the preceding इक् vowel (इ, उ, ऋ or लृ); confer, compareक्ङिति च, Pāṇ. I.1.5; (2) considered or looked upon as marked with mute indicatory क् for preventing guna; confer, compare असंयोगाल्लिट् कित् and the following P.I.2.5 et cetera, and others The affixes of the first type are for instance क्त, क्त्वा, क्तिन् and others. The affixes of the second type are given mainly in the second pada of the first Adhyāya by Pāṇini. Besides the prevention of guṇa and wrddhi, affixes marked with कु or affixes called कित्, cause Saṁprasāraṇa (see P. VI.1.15,16), elision of the penultimate न् (P.VI.4.24), elision of the penultimate vowel (P. VI.4.98,100), lengthening of the vowel (VI.4.15), substitution of ऊ (VI.4.19,21), elision of the final nasal (VI. 4.37), substitution of अI (VI.4.42). The taddhita affixes which are marked with mute क् cause the Vṛddhi substitute for the first vowel in the word to which they are addedition
kumudādiclass of words (१) consisting of कुमुद, शर्करा, न्यग्रोध et cetera, and others to which the taddhita affix ठक् is applied in the four senses given in P.IV.2.67-70; exempli gratia, for example कुमुदिकम्,शर्करिकम् etc(2) consisting of कुमुद गोमय, रथकार etc to which the taddhita affix इक ( ठक् ) is applied in the senses referred to in (I): exempli gratia, for example कौमुदिकम् , राथकारिकम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.2.80.
kṛtliterally activity; a term used in the grammars of Pāṇini and others for affixes applied to roots to form verbal derivatives; confer, compare कृदतिङ् । धातोः ( ३ ।१।९१ ) इत्यधिकारे तिङ्कवर्जितः प्रत्ययः कृत् स्यात् । Kāś. on III.1.93, The kṛt affixes are given exhaustively by Pāṇini in Sūtras III.1.91 to III.4. I17. कृत् and तद्धित appear to be the ancient Pre-Pāṇinian terms used in the Nirukta and the Prātiśākhya works in the respective senses of root-born and noun-born words ( कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त according to Pāṇini's terminology), and not in the sense of mere affixes; confer, compare सन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैकपदिकाः Nirukta of Yāska.I.14: अथापि भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; तिङ्कृत्तद्धितसमासा: शब्दमयम् V.Pr. I.27; also confer, compare V.Pr. VI.4. Patañjali and later grammarians have used the word कृत् in the sense of कृदन्त; confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari Śek.Pari.75. The kṛt affixes are given by Pāṇini in the senses of the different Kārakas अपादान, संप्रदान, करण, अाधकरण, कर्म and कर्तृ, stating in general terms that if no other sense is assigned to a kṛt affix it should be understood that कर्ता or the agent of the verbal activity is the sense; confer, compare कर्तरि कृत् । येष्वर्थनिर्देशो नास्ति तत्रेदमुपतिष्ठते Kāś. on III.4.67. The activity element possessed by the root lies generally dormant in the verbal derivative nouns; confer, compare कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति, क्रियावदपि । M.Bh.on V.4.19 and VI. 2.139
kaumāra,komāravyākaraṇa(1)an alternative name of the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa given to it on the strength of the traditional belief that the original inspiration for writing it was received by Sarvavarman from Kumara or Kārtikeya; (2) small treatises bearing the name Kaumāravyākaraṇa written by Munipuṅgava and Bhāvasena. The latter has written Kātantrarūpamāla also.
kramapāṭharecital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.
kriyāaction, verbal activity; confer, compare क्रियावचनो धातु: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.1 ; confer, compare also क्रियावाचकमाख्यातम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8. quoted by Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.in his Bhāṣya on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50; confer, compare also उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I.4.59, लक्षणहेत्वेाः क्रियायाः P.III. 2.126; confer, compare also यत्तर्हि तदिङ्गितं चेष्टितं निमिषितं स शब्दः । नेत्याह क्रिया नाम सा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 1. The word भाव many times is used in the same sense as kriyā or verbal activity in the sūtras of Pāṇini. confer, compare P.I.2.21 ; I.3.13; III. 1. 66.etc; confer, compare also कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति a statement made frequently by the Mahābhāṣyakāra. Some scholars draw a nice distinction between क्रिया and भाव, क्रिया meaning dynamic activity and भाव meaning static activity: confer, compare अपरिस्पन्दनसाधनसाध्यो धात्वर्थो भावः । सपरिस्पन्दनसाधनसाध्यस्तु क्रिया Kaiyaṭa's Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). III. 1.87. Philosophically क्रिया is defined as सत्ता appearing in temporal sequence in various things. When सत्ता does not so appear it is called सत्त्व.
kṣitīśacandra(चक्रवर्तिन्)or K. C. CHATTERJI a scholar of Sanskrit grammar who has written a work on technical terms in Sanskrit, who has edited several grammar works and is at present editing the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa and conducting the Sanskrit journal named Mañjūṣa at Calcutta.
gaṇaratnamahodadhia grammar work, consisting of a metrical enumeration of the words in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini, written by Vardhamāna, a Jain grammarian of the 12th century, who is believed to have been one of the six gems at the court of Lakṣmaṇasena of Bengal. Vardhamāna has written a commentary also, on his Gaṇaratnamahodadhi. Besides Vardhamāna's commentary, there are other commentaries written by गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.
gatyarthaa root denoting motion; the word frequently occurs in the Sūtras of Pāṇini and the Mahābhāṣya in connection with some special operations prescribed for roots which are गत्यर्थ. There is also a conventional expression सर्वे गत्यर्था ज्ञानार्था: meaning 'roots denoting motion denote also knowledge'; confer, compare Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. Pari. 121 .
gopavanādia class of eight words headed by the word गोपवन, the taddhita affix in the sense of गोत्र ( i. e. a descendant excepting a son or a daughter) such as the affix यञ् or अञू after which, is not elided in the plural number; c. g. गौपवना:, शौग्रवा: et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 4.67.
grahaṇa(1)technical term for a word or प्रातिपदिक in Veda; confer, compare ग्रहणस्य च । गृह्यते इति ग्रहणं वेदस्थः इाब्दः । तत् त्रिविधम् । कार्यभाक्, निमित्तम्, उपबन्ध इति । तस्यापि स्वरूपपूर्वकः अकारः आख्या भवति । Com. on T.Pr.I.22; (2) citing, quoting; confer, compare ग्रहणवता प्रातिपादिकेन न तदन्तविधिः Par.Sek. Pari. 3I ; confer, compare also गृह्णन्तीति ग्रहणाानि Com. on T.Pr.I.24. (3) mention, inclusion; (4) employment in a rule of grammar; confer, compare प्रातिपादिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Par. Sek.Pari.71.
grahaṇakaciting or instructing the inclusion ( ग्रहण) of certain other things by the mention of a particular thing; e. g. the rule अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः is a ग्रहणक rule as it advises that the citing of the letters अ, इ, उ, ऋ et cetera, and others includes the long and protracted forms of अ, इ, उ etc; confer, compare also ग्रहणकशास्त्रस्य सावर्ण्यविधिनिषेधाभ्यां प्रागनिष्पत्ते; Sid. Kau. on अकः सवर्णे दीर्धः V1. 1. 101.
grāsaa fault in the utterance of a letter which makes it indistinct by being held up at the throat.Seeग्रस्त.
ghi(1)a tech. term applied to noun bases or Prātipadikas ending in इ and उ excepting the words सखि and पति and those which are termed नदी; confer, compare P. I. 4.79; (2) a conventional term for लधु ( a short vowel) found used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
(1)fifth letter of the guttural class of consonants having the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य; (2) the consonant ङ् getting the letter ,क as an augment added to it, if standing at the end of a word and followed by a sibilant, e. g. प्राङ्कूशेते confer, compare ङ्णो: कुक् टुक् शरि P. VIII. 3.28; (3) the consonant ङ् which, standing at the end of a word and preceded by a short vowel, causes the vowel following it to get the augment ङ् prefixed to it; e. g, प्रत्यङ्ङास्ते confer, compare ङमो ह्रस्वादचि ङमुण् नित्यम् P. VIII.3.32.
ṅit(l)affixes with the mute letter ङ् attached to them either before or after, with a view to preventing the guna and vrddhi substitutes for the preceding इ, उ, ऋ, or लृ, as for example, the affixes चङ्, अङ् and others (2) affixes conventionally called ङित् after certain bases under certain conditions; confer, compare गाङ्कुटादिम्यो ञ्णिन्ङित् P. I. 2. 1-4; (3) roots marked with the mute letter ङ् signifying the application of the Atmanepada terminations to them: (4) substitutes marked with mute ङ् which are put in the place of the last letter of the word for which they are prescribed as substitutes; (5) case affixes marked with mute letter ङ् which cause the substitution of guna to the last vowel इ or उ of words termed घि.
ṅīṣfeminine. afix ई, which is udatta, applied to words in the class of words headed by गौर, as also to noun bases ending in affixes marked with.mute ष्, as also to words mentioned in the class headed by बहुः confer, compare P.IV.1.41-46.It is also added in the sense of 'wife of' to any word denoting a male person; confer, compare P. IV. 1. 48, and together with the augment आनुक् (आन्) to the words इन्द्र, वरुण etc exempli gratia, for example इन्द्राणी, वरुणानि, यवनानि meaning 'the script of the Yavanas' confer, compare P. IV. 1.49. It is also added words ending in क्रीत and words ending in क्त and also to words expressive of ' limbs of body ' under certain conditions; confer, compare P.IV.1. 50-59 and IV. 1.61-65.
cakrakaa kind of fault in the application of operations, resulting in confusion; a fault in which one returns to the same place not immediately as in Anavastha but after several steps; confer, compare पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः पुनराट् इति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नोति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.60 Vart 5.
caturmātraconsisting of four matras or moras, a short vowel consisting of one matra, a long vowel of two matras, and a protracted vowel of three matras; confer, compare आन्तर्यतस्त्रिमात्रचतुर्मात्राणां स्थानिनां त्रिमात्रचतुर्मात्रा आदेशा मा भूवन्निति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva sutra 3.4.
candraa famous Buddhist Sanskrit grammarian whose grammar existing in the Tibetan script, is now available in the Devanagar script. The work consists of six chapters or Adhyayas in which no technical terms or sanjnas like टि, घु are found. There is no section on Vedic Grammar and accents. The work is based on Panini's grammar and is believed to have been written by Candra or Candragomin in the 5th centnry A. D. Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya refers to him; confer, compare स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary of the work is found in the Agnipurana, ch. 248-258.
carcā(1)splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.
cārthathe meaning of the indeclinable च to convey which, as existing in different individuals, the dvandva compound is prescribeditionOut of the four senses possessed by the inde clinable च, the Dvandva compound is prescribed in two senses viz.इतरेतरयोग and समाहार out of the four समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार: confer, compare कः पुनश्चेन कृतोर्थः समुच्चयोन्वाचय इतरेतरयोगः समाहार इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.29; confer, compare also Candra Vyakarana II.2.48
cidasthimālāname of a commentary on the Laghusabdendusekhara by Vaidyanatha Payagunde,one of the distinguished disciples of Nagesabhatta.
cintā(1)view; theory. exempli gratia, for example बाध्यसामान्यचिन्ता, बाध्यविशेषचिन्ता confer, compare इयमेव बाध्यसामान्यचिन्तेति व्यवह्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 58; (2) a matter of scrutiny on a suspicion; confer, compare चिन्ता च-मयतेरिदन्यतरस्याम् इत्यतोन्यतरस्यांग्रहणस्य सिंहावलोकनन्यायादनुव्रुत्तेः; Durghata Vr. on VI.4.69.
jaśtvasubstitution of a जश् consonant prescribed by Panini for any consonant excepting a semi-vowel or a nasal, if followed by any fourth or third consonant out of the class consonants, or if it is at the end of a pada; confer, compare P.VIII. 2.39, VIII.4. 53.
jātisvarathe acute accent for the last vowel of a word ending with क्त of the past passive participle. denoting a genus; confer, compare P. VI. 2.170.
jainendravyākaraṇaname of a grammar work written by Pujyapada Devanandin, also called Siddhanandin, in the fifth century A.D. The grammar is based on the Astadhyay of Panini,the section on Vedic accent and the rules of Panini explaining Vedic forms being,of course, neglectedition The grammar is called Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra Sabdanusasana. The work is available in two versions, one consisting of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700 sutras. it has got many commentaries, of which the Mahavrtti written by Abhayanandin is the principal one. For details see Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction published by the Bharatiya Jnanapitha Varadasi.
jauhotyādikaa root belonging to the जुहोत्यादिगण or the third conjugation. ज्ञानदीपिका name of a commentary on Amarasimha’s Amarakosa written by Sripati (Chakravartin) in the 14th century.
jñāpyaa conclusion or formula to be drawn from a Jñāpaka word or words; confer, compare the usual expression यावता विनानुपपत्तिस्तावतो ज्ञाप्यत्वम् stating that only so much, as is absolutely necessary, is to be inferredition
jhala short term (प्रत्याहार ) for consonants excepting semi-vowels and nasals; confer, compare P.I.2.9, VI.1.58, VI.4. 15, VII.1.60, VIII. 2.39 and VIII.4.53.
ṭakkrt affix अ, not admitting गुण or वृद्धि to the preceding vowel and causing ङीप् in the feminine ( by P.IV. 1.15), added to the roots गा, पा and हन् under certain conditions; e. g. समग;, सुरापः, पतिघ्नी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2.8, 52, 53, 54, 55.
ṭāpfeminine affix अा added to masculine nouns ending in अ by the rule अजाद्यतष्टाप् IV. 1.4 excepting those nouns where any other affix prescribed by subsequent rules becomes applicable.
ṭithe final syllable beginning with a vowel; part of a word consisting of the final vowel in a word and the consonants following the final vowel; cf अचेन्त्यादि टि P. I. 1.64.
ṭhaka very common taddhita affix. affix इक, or क in case it is added to words ending in इस् , उस् , उ, ऋ, ल् and त् according to P. VII. 3. 51, causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ठक् is added to (1) रेवती and other words in the sense of descendant ( अपत्य ) e. g. रैवतिकः:, दाण्डग्राहिकः, गार्गिकः, भागवित्तिकः यामुन्दायनिकः, confer, compare P. IV. 1.146-149; (2) to the words लाक्षा,रोचना et cetera, and others in the sense of 'dyed in', e. g. लाक्षिकम्, रौचनिकम् ; confer, compare P. IV. 2.2; (3) to the words दधि and उदश्वित् in the sense of संस्कृत 'made better ', e. g. दाधिकम् , औदश्वित्कम् ( क instead of इक substituted for टक् ), confer, compare P. IV.2. 18, 19; (4) to the words अाग्रहायुणी, अश्वत्थ et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 22, 23; (5) to words expressive of inanimate objects, to the words हस्ति and धेनु, as also to the words केश and अश्व in the sense of 'multitude '; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 47, 48; (6) to the words क्रतु, उक्थ and words ending in सूत्र, वसन्त et cetera, and others, in the sense of 'students of' ( तदधीते तद्वेद ), confer, compare P. IV. 2.59, 60, 63; (7) to the words कुमुद and others as also to शर्करा as a चातुरर्थिक affix; confer, compare P. IV. 2.80, 84; (8) to the words कन्था, भवत् and वर्षा in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P. IV. 2.102, 115, IV. 3.18; (9) to the words उपजानु and others in the sense 'generally present '; confer, compare P. IV. 3. 40; (10) to the words consisting of two syllables, and the words ऋक्, ब्राह्मण et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'explanatory literary work'; confer, compare P. IV.3.72: ( 11) to words meaning 'sources of income ' in the sense of 'accruing from’; confer, compare P. IV. 3.75; (12) to words denoting inanimate things excepting words showing time or place in the sense of ' भक्ति ', cf P. IV. 8.96; and (13) to the words हल् and सीर in the sense of 'belonging to', confer, compare P. IV. 3.124. The taddhita affix. affix ठक् is added as a general termination, excepting in such cases where other affixes are prescribed, in specified senses like 'तेन दीव्यति, ' 'तेन खनति,' 'तेन संस्कृतम्' et cetera, and others; cf P. IV. 4.1-75, as also to words हल, सीर, कथा, विकथा, वितण्डा et cetera, and others in specified senses, confer, compare P. IV.4. 81, 102 ठक् is also added as a general taddhita affix. affix or अधिकारविहितप्रत्यय, in various specified senses, as prescribed by P. V.1.19-63,and to the words उदर, अयःशूल,दण्ड, अजिन, अङ्गुली, मण्डल, et cetera, and others and to the word एकशाला, in the prescribed senses; confer, compare P. V. 2.67,76, V. 3.108,109; while, without making any change in sense it is added to अनुगादिन् , विनय, समय, उपाय ( औपयिक being the word formed), अकस्मात्, कथंचित्; (confer, compareआकस्मिक काथंचित्क), समूह,विशेष, अत्यय and others, and to the word वाक् in the sense of 'expressed'; confer, compare P. V. 4.13, 34, 35. The feminine. affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to words ending in the affix टक् to form feminine. bases.
ṭhañtaddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) causing Vrddhi and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, applied (1) to महृाराज, प्रोष्ठपद and क्वाचिन् in the specifieditionsenses, confer, compare P. IV.2.35, 4l e. g. माहृाराजिक, प्रौष्ठपदिक et cetera, and others; (2) to words काशि, चेदि, संज्ञा and others, along with ञिठ, e. g. काशिकी, काशिका, also with ञिठ to words denoting villages in the Vahika country exempli gratia, for example शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as also to words ending in उ forming names of countries in all the Saisika senses confer, compare P. IV.2.116-120; (3) to compound words having a word showing direction as their first member, to words denoting time, as also to the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the Saisika senses; cf P. IV.3.6, 7, 1115; (4) to the words वर्षा (1n Vedic Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P.IV.3.1921; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words having अन्तः as the first member, to the word ग्राम preceded by परि or अनु, to multisyllabic words having their last vowel accented acute, to words denoting sacrifices, to words forming names of sages, to words ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज in the specific senses which are mentioned; confer, compare P. IV.3.50, 60, 61, 67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, आक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध, compound words having a multisyllabic words as their first member, and to the words गुड et cetera, and others in the specified senses;confer, compareP.IV.4.6,II, 38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word as a general taddhita affix. affix (अधिकारविहित), unless any other affix has been specified in the specified senses ' तेन क्रीतम् ' ' तस्य निमित्तम्' ... ' तदर्हम्' mentioned in the section of sutras V. 1. 18. to 117; (8) to the words अय:शूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words having एक or गो as their first member as also to the words निष्कशत and निष्कसहस्र; confer, compare P.V.2.76, 118,119.
(1)fourth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and महृाप्राणत्व; (2) the consonant ढ् which is elided when followed by ढ् and the preceding vowel is lengthened; e. g. गाढा, confer, compare P. VIII. 3.13 and VI. 3.111 ; (3) substitute ढ् for ह् at the end of a पद, or, if followed by any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal excepting in the cases of roots beginning with द् or the roots द्रुह्, मुह् et cetera, and others as also वह् and अाह् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.31, 32, 33, 34; (4) ढ् at the beginning of a taddhita affix. affix which has got एय् substituted for it; confer, compare गाङ्गेय:, वैनतेयः ; confer, compare P. V. 3.102.
ḍhaktaddhita affix. affix एय causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ढक् is added in the sense of अपत्य (descendant) (I) to words ending in feminine affixes, to words ending in the vowel इ, excepting इ of the taddhita affix. afix इञ्, to words of the class headed by शुभ्र, to words मण्डूक, विकर्ण, कुषीतक, भ्रू , .कुलटा and to words headed by कल्याणी which get इन substituted for its !ast vowel; exempli gratia, for example सौपर्णेयः, दात्तेयः शौभ्रेय, माण्डूकेयः, , वैकर्णेयः, कौषीतकेयः, भ्रौवेयः,.कौलटेयः, काल्याणिनेयः etc: cf Kas on P. IV.I. 1 19-127; (2) to the words पितृष्वसृ and मातृष्वसृ with the vowel ऋ elided and to the word . दुष्कुल, पितृष्वसेय:, मातृष्वसेयः, दौष्कुलेयः, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.133, 134, 142: (3) to the word कलि in the sense of Sama, to the word अग्नि in the sense of 'dedicated to a deity' ( सास्य देवता ) as also to the words नदी, मही, वाराणसी, श्रावस्ती and others in the Saisika senses; e. g. कालेयं साम, आग्नेयः, नादेयम् महियम् et cetera, and others cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.8, 33, 97: (4) to the words तूदी, धुर् , कपि, ज्ञाति, व्रीहि and शालि in the specified senses; confer, compare P. IV. 3.94, IV. 4.77, V. 1.127, V. 2.2.
(1)fifth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्यः (2) the mute letter ण् indicating the substitution of vrddhi ( confer, compare P. VII. 2. 115-117) when attached to affixes; (3) the consonant ण् at the beginning of roots which is changed into न्; the roots, having ण् at the beginning changeable to न्, being called णोपदेशः (4) ण् as a substitute for न् following the letters ऋ, ॠ, र्, and ष् directly, or with the intervention of consonants of the guttural and labial classes, but occurring in the same word, Such a substitution of ण् for न् is called णत्व; confer, compare P.VIII.4. I-39. For णत्व in Vedic Literature; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)V.20-28, T.Pr.VII.1-12. V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ण् added as an augment to a vowel at the beginning of a word when it follows the consonant ण् at the end of the previous word; confer, compare P. VIII. 3. 32. In the Vedic Pratisakhyas this augment ण् is added to the preceding ण् and looked upon as a part of the previous word.
ṇicaffix इ causing Vrddhi (1) applied to roots of the tenth conjugation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित् et cetera, and others e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; confer, compare P. III. 1.25: (2) applied to any root to form a causal base from it, e. g. भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: confer, compare हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the sense of making, doing, practising et cetera, and others ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति, व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति et cetera, and others; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल, श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण in the various senses given by the Varttikakara to form denominative roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति, पाशयति etc; confer, compare P. III.1.25: (5) applied to suitable words in the sense of composing, exempli gratia, for example सूत्रं करोति सूत्रयति, et cetera, and others: (6)applied to a verbal noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'narrating' with the omission of the krt affix and the karaka of the verbal activity put in a suitable case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति, पुष्येण योजयति et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त) take the conjugational endings of both the Parasmaipada and the, Atmanepada: confer, compare णिचश्च P. I. 3.74. They have perfect forms by the addition of अाम् with a suitable form of the perfect tense of the root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्, the word ending with अाम् and the verbal form after it being looked upon as separate words e. g. कारयां चकार कारयां चक्रे et cetera, and others; cf P. III.1.35, 40. They have the aorist form, with the substitution of the Vikarana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which the root is reduplicated; e. g. अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.III.1.48, VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
tatkālaprāptikaoccurring or presenting itself at the same time or simultaneously.
tadantavidhia peculiar feature in the interpretation of the rules of Panini, laid down by the author of the Sutras himself by virtue of which an adjectival word, qualifying its principal word, does not denote itself, but something ending with it also; confer, compare येन विधिस्तदन्तस्य P.I.1.72.This feature is principally noticed in the case of general words or adhikaras which are put in a particular rule, but which Occur in a large number of subsequent rules; for instance, the word प्रातिपदिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in every rule upto the end of chapter V and the words अतः, उतः, यञः et cetera, and others mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् , यञन्तात् et cetera, and others Similarly the words धातोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI. 4.1 ) occurring in a number of subsequent rules have the adjectival words to them, which are mentioned in subsequent rules, denoting not only those words,but words ending with them. In a large number of cases this feature of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it, goes against arriving at the desired forms, and exceptions deduced from Panini's rules are laid down by the Varttikakara and later grammarians; confer, compare Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23, 31 : also Mahabhasya on P.I.1.72.
taddhitaa term of the ancient prePaninian grammarians used by Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय without giving any specific definition of it. The term occurs in the Nirukta of Yaska and the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya ; confer, compare अथ तद्वितसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; also confer, compare तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम् Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted that the word तद्वित is used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of a word derived from a substantive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application of suffixes like अ, यत् et cetera, and others, and not in the sense of words derived from roots by affixes like अन, ति et cetera, and others which were termed नामकरण, as possibly contrasted with the word ताद्धित used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has used the word तद्धित not for words, but for the suffixes which are added to form such words at all places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17, 76, VI.1.61 et cetera, and others). in fact, he has begun the enumeration of taddhita affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1. 76) by putting the term तद्धित for affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् et cetera, and others which are mentioned thereafter. In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart. 41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27 quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word तद्धित appears to be actually used for words derived from nouns by secondary affixes, along with the word कृत् which also means words derived from roots, although commentators have explained there the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which, although it is not the first Sutra there were possibly long lists of secondary nouns with the senses of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was perhaps,the first sense given there. The number of taddhita suffixes mentioned by Panini is quite a large one; there are in fact 1110 rules given in the taddhita section covering almost two Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76 to the end of the fifth Adhyaya. The main sub-divisions of taddhita affixes mentioned by commentators are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to 178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to 91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133), Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168), Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74), Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109), Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikarastha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhavakarmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136), Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93), Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2. 140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes (V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be included in the Svarthika affixes.
tārānāthacalled तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali modern Sanskrit scholar and grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary called Sarala on the Siddhanta Kaumudi. He has edited many important Sanskrit works consisting of many kosas.
tulyādhikaraṇahaving got the same substratum; denoting ultimately the same object; expressed in the same case the same as samanadhikarana in the grammar of Panini, confer, compare Kat. II.5.5.
tṛjantaa word ending in the affix तृच् and hence getting the guna vowel (i. e. अ ) substituted for the final vowel ऋ before the Sarvanamasthana (i. e. the first five) case affixes; confer, compare तृजन्त आदेशॊ भविष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII. 1.96.
taittirīyaprātiśākhyacalled also कृष्णयजुःप्रातिशाख्य and hence representing possibly all the different branches or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is not attributed definitely to a particular author but is supposed to have been revised from time to time and taught by various acaryas who were the followers of the Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divided into two main parts, each of which is further divided into twelve sections called adhyayas, and discusses the various topics such as letters and their properties, accents, euphonic changes and the like, just as the other Pratisakhya works. It is believed that Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhasyas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, but at present, only two important commentary works on it are available(a) the 'Tribhasyaratna', based upon the three Bhasyas mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as the title shows, written by Somayarya and (b) the 'Vaidikabharana' written by Gopalayajvan. For details see Introduction to 'Taittiriya Pratisakhya' edition Govt Oriental Library Series, Mysore.
traltaddhita affix. affix termed Vibhakti added to pronouns excepting द्वि and others, and to the words बहु and किम् when they end with the locative case case termination: exempli gratia, for example कुत्र, तत्र, बहुत्र et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 1.10, 14.
trimātraconsisting of three moras or matras. The protracted or प्लुत vowels are said to consist of three matras as contrasted with the short and long vowels which respectively consist of one and two matras; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I.2.27.
thā(1)taddhita affix. affix था in the sense of question or reason ( हेतु ) added to the pronoun किम् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example कथा देवा आसन् ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.3.26; (2) taddhita affix. affix था (थाल् according to Panini) which gets caesura or avagraha after प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व, इम and ऋतु; exempli gratia, for example प्रत्नथेतिं प्रत्नSथा, पूर्वथेति पूर्वऽथा et cetera, and others: confer, compare Vij. Pr.V.12: (3) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of इव added to the words प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व and इम in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा; cf Kas, on P. V.3.111: (4) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of mannar ( प्रक्रार) added to किन् , pronouns excepting those headed by द्वि, and the word बहु; exempli gratia, for example सर्वथा, confer, compare P V.3.23.
dthird consonant of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द् substituted for the final letter of nouns ending with the affix वस् as also for the final letter of स्रंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् provided the final letter is at the end of a pada; exempli gratia, for example विद्वद्भयाम् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द् substituted for the final स् of roots excepting the root.अस्, before the personal ending तिप् of the third person. singular.; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; confer, compare P. VIII. 3.93.
dagghaa fault of pronunciation where the letters are uttered indistinct ( अस्पष्ट ).
dayānandasarasvatia brilliant Vedic scholar of the nineteenth century belonging to North India who established on a sound footing the study of the Vedas and Vyakarana and encouraged the study of Kasikavrtti. He has written many books on vedic studies.
dikśabdaa word denoting a direction such as पूर्व, उत्तर and the like, used as a substantive, e. g. पूर्वो ग्रामात् , or showing the direction of another thing being its adjective, e. g. इयमस्याः पूर्वा; cf Kas, on P. II.3.29.
drutaliterally rapid; the vice of rapidity in utterance;a fault of speech especially in connection with the utterance of vowels in Vedic recital when on account of haste the utterance of letters becomes indistinct. confer, compare संदृष्टमेणीकृतमर्धकं द्रुतं विकीर्णमेताः स्वरद्रोषभावनाः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1 vart. 18.
dviḥprayogadoubling, putting a word or word element twice;the words द्वित्व and द्विर्वचन are used in the same sense.
kāryayogasimultaneous occurrence of two grammatical operations resulting into a conflict and creating a doubt as to which of the two should take place first; confer, compareद्विकार्ययोगो हि विप्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on P.I.1.3 Vart. 6; I.1.12; et cetera, and others The term विप्रतिषेध occurring in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I.4.2 is evidently defined in this way by the word द्विकार्ययोग in the Mahabhsya.
dviguname of a compound with a numeral as the first member. The compound is looked upon as a subdivision of the Tatpurusa comPoundThe dvigu compound, having collection as its general sense, is declined in the neuter gender and singular number; when it ends in अ the feminine. affix ङी is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्, त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu comPound also takes place when a karmadharaya compound, having a word denoting a direction or a numeral as its first member, (a) has a taddhita affix. affix added to it exempli gratia, for example पञ्चकपाळः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a word placed after it in a compound e. g. पशञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a collective sense exempli gratia, for example पञ्चपूली; confer, compare तद्वितार्थोत्तरपदसमाहारे च ( P. II.1.51 ) also, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. and S. K. om P.II.1.51,52.
dvitvadoubling, reduplication prescribed for (I) a root in the perfect tense excepting the cases where the affix अाम् is added to the root before the personal ending: exempli gratia, for example बभूव, चकार, ऊर्णुनाव et cetera, and others cf P. VI. 1.1,2; (2) a root before the vikarana affixes सन्, यङ्, श्लु and चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयते, चर्करीति, जुहोति, अचीकरत् et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VI. 1.9l l ; (3) a word ending in अम् . ( णमुल् ) in the sense of repetition, e. g. स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति confer, compare आभीक्ष्ण्ये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart. 7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of constant or frequent action, (b) in the sense of repetition, (c) showing reproach, or scorn, or quality in the sense of its incomplete possess-, ion, or (d) in the vocative case at the beginning of a sentence in some specified senses; reduplication is also prescribed for the prepositions परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अघस् in some specified senses confer, compare P. VIII. 1.1 to 15. A letter excepting हृ and र्, is also repeated, if so desired, when (a) it occurs after the letter ह् or र् , which is preceded by a vowel e g. अर्क्कः अर्द्धम् et cetera, and others cf VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it is preceded by a vowel and followed by a consonant e. g. दद्ध्यत्र, म्द्धवत्र confer, compare P. VIII. 4.47. For details see Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VIII. 4.46-52. The word द्वित्व is sometimes used in the sense of the dual number; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.2.51. The words द्वित्व, द्विर्वचन and द्विरुक्त are generally used as synonymanuscript. Panini generally uses the word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Vedic Literature confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1.4; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 1-8 V, Pr. IV. 101-118.
dvicata syllable consisting of two consonants; confer, compare Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 245.
dvisvarapossessed of two vowels,dissyllabic; confer, compare न पदे द्विस्वरे नित्यम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVI. 17. द्विस्स्पृष्ट a term used for an upadhmaniya letter or a phonetic element resulting from a visarga followed by the letter प्, or फ़्. See उपध्मांनीय.The word is also used sometimes for the pronunciation ळ् of ड्, and ळ्ह् of ढ्. See दुःस्पृष्ट.
dvaipadgroup of two words; an expression consisting of two words; cf प्र वोचं नः सुमना द्वैपदाश्च Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VIII. 2. 10; X. 3; XI. 37 et cetera, and others
dvyūṣmanname of a Samdhi made up of two spirants, or resulting in the presence of two spirants or Usman letters exempli gratia, for example निष्षिध्बरी:, स्वस्साता; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI. 22.
dhātua root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
dhātuvṛttia general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.
dhātvartheliterally meaning of a root, the verbal activity, named क्रिया or भावः . confer, compare धात्वर्थः क्रिया; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2. 84, III.2.115. The verbal activity is described generally to be made up of a series of continuous subordinate activities carried on by the different karakas or agents and instruments of verbal activity helping the process of the main activity. When the process of the verbal activity is complete, the completed activity is looked upon as a substantive or dravya and a word denoting it, such as पाक,or याग does not get conjugational affixes, but it is regularly declined like a noun.Just as स्वार्थ, द्रब्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या, and कारक are given as प्रातिपदिकार्थ, in the same manner क्रिया, काल, पुरुष, वचन or संख्या, and कारक are given as धात्वर्थ, as they are shown by a verbal form, although strictly speaking verbal activity (क्रियorभाव) alone is the sense of a root, as stated in the Mahbhasya. For details see Vaiyak.Bh.Sara, where it is said that fruit ( फल) and effort ( ब्यापार ) are expressed by a root, confer, compare फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः. The five senses given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. are in fact conveyed not by a root, but by a verb or अाख्यात or तिडन्त.
dhuṭ(1)the augment ध् prefixed to the consonant स् following upon the consonant ड् or न् occurring at the end of a word; exempli gratia, for example श्वलिट्त्साये, महान्त्साये et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII.3.29; (2) technical short term for धातु (root); the technical term is धुष् , but the nominative case. singular. used is धुट्; (3) a technical term standing for cononants excepting semi-vowels and nasals; confer, compare धुटश्च धुटि Kat. III.6.51. The term is used in the Katantra Vyakarana. It corresponds to the term झर् of Panini.
nadīa technical term applied in Panini's grammar to words in the feminine gender ending in ई and ऊ excepting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and others; it is optionally applied to words ending in इ and उ, of course in the feminine. gender, before case affixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative singular. The term was probably in use before Panini and was taken from the feminine. word नदी which was taken as a model. Very probably there was a long list of words like नद् ( नदट्) चोर ( चोरट् ) et cetera, and others which were given as ending in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्) was added for forming the feminine base;the first word नदी so formed, was taken as a model and all words in the list and similar others were called नदी; confer, compare P. I 4. 3-6.
naddhaa fault of pronunciation when a letter, although distinctly pronounced inside the mouth, does not become audible, being held up ( बद्ध ) by the lips or the like. The fault is similar to अम्बूकृत: confer, compare ओष्ठाभ्यामम्बूकृतमाह नद्धम् R.Pr.XIV.2.
napuṃsakasvarathe special accent viz. the acute accent for the first vowel for nouns in the neuter gender excepting those that end in इस्, as prescribed by नबिषयस्यानिसन्तस्य Phitsutra 11; confer, compare नपुंसकस्वरो मा भूत् M.Bh. on P.VII.1.77.
(1)taddhita affix. affix ना as also नाञ् prescribed respectively after वि and नञ् (negative particle न ) in the sense of separation; e. g. विना, नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted for the inst. instrumental case. singular. affix टा (called also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in the masculine gender after words called घि i. e. words ending in इ or उ excepting such as are called नदी.
nāsikāsthānaa place in the nose where a nasal letter such as ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न् or म् and anusvara get a tinge of nasalization while passing through it. The yama letters e.g the nasal क्, ख् ,ग् , घ् get nasalization in the utterance of the words पलिक्किनः, चख्ख्नतुः, अग्ग्निः, घ्घ्नन्ति; confer, compare यमो नाम वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P. VIII. 2. 1. confer, compare also यमानुस्वारनासिक्यानां नासिके Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 74, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 12.
nipātaa particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
nipātāvyayopasargavṛttiashort treatise explaining and illustrating the use of indeclinables, written by a grammarian named तिलक who probably lived in Kasmira.
nimitta(1)the formal cause of a grammatical operation; confer, compare निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभाव; given as a Paribhasa by many grammarians like Vyadi, Siradeva and others; confer, compare also प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयो निमित्तं प्रत्ययेा निमित्ती M.Bh. on III.1.1 Vart. 2; (2) distinguishing sign यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी भवति स: अध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते वेदिकां पुण्डरीकं वा, M.Bh. on I.1.26 Vart.5.
niyata(1)regulated in size or number; definitely fixed; the word नियत is used in grammar in connection with the nimitta or nimittin in a grammatical operation prescribed by a rule, which, or a part of which, is shown to be superfluous unless there is laid down a regulation; confer, compare शेषग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् । शेषनियमार्थम् | प्रकृत्यर्थौ नियतौ प्रत्यया अनियतास्ते शेषेपि प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on I.3.12 Vart. 6; (2) The grave accent; cf उदात्तपूर्वं नियतं... स्वर्यते RPr.III.9.
niyama(1)restriction; regulation; binding; the term is very frequently used by grammarians in connection with a restriction laid down with reference to the application of a grammatical rule generally on the strength of that rule, or a part of it, liable to become superfluous if the restriction has not been laid down; confer, compare M.Bh. on I. 1. 3, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11; confer, compare also the frequently quoted dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2) limitation as contrasted with विकल्प or कामचार; confer, compare अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो भवति शेषेष्वनियम; पटुमृदुशुक्लाः पटुशुक्लमृदव इति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2. 34 Vart. 2; (3) a regulating rule; a restrictive rule, corresponding to the Parisamkhya statement of the Mimamsakas, e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; the grammarians generally take a rule as a positive injunction avoiding a restrictive sense as far as possible; confer, compare the dictum विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरेव ज्यायान्. Par. Sek. Pari. 100; the commentators have given various kinds of restrictions,. such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधेयनियम,अर्थनियम, प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम et cetera, and otherset cetera, and others; (4) grave accent or anudatta; confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं नियतम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 9; see नियत (2).
niyāmakalimiting; limitative; confer, compare तुः क्रियते । स नियामको भविष्यति । अमेवापञ्चम्याः इति M. Bh, on II. 4.83; confer, compare also लोके निमित्तं द्विविधं दृष्टम् । कार्यस्थितौ नियामकं तदनियामकं च Par. Sek. Pari. 56.
nirvacanainterpretation by means of etymology as found in the Nirukta works; the act of fully uttering the meaning hidden in words that are partially or wholly unintelligible in respect of their derivation, by separating a word into its component letters; confer, compare निष्कृष्य विगृह्य निर्वचनम्, Durgavrtti on Nirukta of Yāska.II. 1.For details see Nirukta II.1.
niṣkṛṣṭaseparated; taken out from a thing; existing only in conception or idea; confer, compare इह केचिद्गुणाः शब्देन द्रव्यान्निष्कृष्टा एव प्रत्याय्यन्ते न तु द्रव्यस्योपरञ्जकत्वेन । यथा चन्दनस्य गन्धः इति । Kaiy. on P. II. 2. 8.
nīcaiḥkaraconstituting the grave accent, features of the grave accent; confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh.on I. 2.30.
numaugment न् inserted after the last vowel (1) of a root given in the Dhātupātha as ending with mute इ; exempli gratia, for example निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच् and others before the conjugational sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; confer, compare P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्, नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain specified conditions, exempli gratia, for exampleमङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declinable bases marked with the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also of the declinable wording अञ्च् from the root अञ्च् and युज्, exempli gratia, for exampleभवान्, श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, confer, compare Kās. on P. VII.1. 70, 71; (5) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with a vowel or with any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal, before a case-ending termed Sarvanāmasthāna; exempli gratia, for example यशांसि, वनानि, जतूनि et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās. on VII.1.72; (6) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ before a case-ending beginning with a vowel; exempli gratia, for example मधुने, शुचिने et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the affix शतृ ( अत् of the present tense. participle.) under certain conditions याती यान्ती; पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, confer, compare I .VII.78-8 : (8) of the word अनडुह् before the nominative case. and vocative case. singular. affix सु;exempli gratia, for example अनड्वान् , हे अनड्वन्, confer, compare P. VII.1. 82; (9) of the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस् before the nominative case. and vocative case.singular.affix सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्, स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , confer, compare P.VII.1.83.
nyāyasaṃgrahaa work enumerating the Paribhāsas in Hemacandra's grammar, numbering 140 nyāyas out of which 57 nyāyas are said to have been given by Hemacandra himself at the end of his comment बृहद्वृत्ति on his Śabdānuśāsana. The work is written by हेमहंसगणि who has added a commentary to it called Nyayārthamaňjūșa by him, which is also known by the name न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
pakṣaalternative view or explanation presented by, or on behalf of, a party ; one of the two or more way of presenting a matter. The usual terms for the two views are पूर्वपक्ष and उत्तरपक्ष, when the views are in conflict. The views, if not in conflict, and if stated as alternative views, can be many in number, e. g. there are seven alternative views or Pakșas re : the interpretation of the rule इको गुणवृद्धी; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.3; confer, compare also सर्वेषु पक्षेषु उपसंख्यानं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64.
patañjalithe reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.
padaa word; a unit forming a part of a sentence; a unit made up of a letter or of letters, possessed of sense; confer, compare अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा । V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word originally was applied to the individual words which constituted the Vedic Samhitā; confer, compare पदप्रकृतिः संहिता Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defined in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (Vājasan